Manual Mantenimiento VJ1604 Mutoh

Service
Manual
ValueJet 1604
AP-74108
Rev. 1.1
Important Notice
VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual
Important Notice
1. For Users in Europe
Important:
This is a Class A product approved for industrial environments. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case you may be required to take
adequate measures.
2. For Users in the United States
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
3. Trademark Mentioned in this Manual
MUTOH, ValueJet, VJ-1604 are registered trademarks or product names of MUTOH INDUSTRIES
LTD.
Centronics and BiCentronics are registered trademarks or product names of Centronics Data Computer
Corporation.
Windows95, Windows98, Windows98SE, Windows NT4.0, Windows2000, Windows XP, and MSDOS are registered trademarks or product names of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Other company and product names may be registered trademarks or product names.
No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

transmitted in any form or by any means, except for personal use,
without the permission of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.
The product and the contents of this publication may be changed

without prior notification.
MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. has made the best efforts to keep this
publication free from error, but if you find any uncertainties or
misprints, please call us or the shop where you bought this equipment.
MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. shall not be liable for any damages or

troubles resulting from the use of this equipment or this manual.
(1)
Warranty Limitations
Warranty Limitations
1. MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. warrants part repair or replacement as a sole measure only if a failure is
found in the system or in the materials and workmanship of the product the seller produced.
However, if the cause of failure is uncertain, decide the action after due mutual consultation.
2. The warranty shall not apply to any direct or indirect loss, or compensation for the loss due to the product
that has been subject to misuse, neglect, or improper alternation.
(2)
About this Manual
About this Manual

1. Purpose and Target Readers
This manual explains preparations needed before maintaining and checking operations for MUTOH Full
Color Ink Jet Printer (VJ-1604).
This manual is prepared for the maintenance personnel of this printer.
Before using this printer, fully understand the contents and directions in this manual.
2. Manual Configuration
Section
Contents
1 Safety Instructions
Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labeled on the printer

for the both operators of the printer and maintenance personnel.
2 Product Overview
Explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
3 Specifications
Explains the specifications of the printer.
4 Parts Replacement
Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the service parts

of the printer.
5 Self-Diagnostic Mode
Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer.
6 Maintenance Mode
Explains the maintenance mode of the printer.
7 Adjustment
Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.
8 Maintenance
Explains daily maintenance of the printer.
9 Troubleshooting
Explains troubles that may occur when using the printer and how to
solve them.
10 Appendix
Explains the maintenance information and the exploded views for this
printer.
Use the built-in self-diagnostic program to locate a defective part and adjust/
check during maintenance.
(3)
About this Manual
3. Manual Notation
The following symbols are used in this manual for easier understanding of the information.
Symbol
Meaning
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
CAUTION
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

your equipment
NOTE
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

product
Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment
TIP
Indicates reference pages in this manual
4. Establishment Date of This Document
This document was established on April 10, 2007.
5. Firmware version covered by this document
Firmware version: V.1.08
(4)
General Table of Contents

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.3 Winding Unit Section (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.4 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.4 Plotter Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.1 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.2 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.1 Network Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4 Options/Supplies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4.2 Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.5
Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2 Removing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1 Removing Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.2 Removing Maintenance Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.3 Removing Maintenance Cover U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Side Maintenance Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.5 Removing Side Maintenance Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.6 Removing Side Top Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.7 Removing Side Top Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.2.8 Removing Rear Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.9 Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.2.10 Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.2.11 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2.12 Removing Switch Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2.13 Removing Switch Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.14 Removing Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2.15 Removing Rear Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2.16 Removing Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.2.17 Removing Media Guide F (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.2.18 Removing Media Guide R (Upper). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.2.19 Removing Media Guide R (Lower). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.3 Replacing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Replacing Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 Replacing Front Cover Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Replacing Front Cover Gear, Damper Gear (Sintered) . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-35
4.4 Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.1 Opening Board Box 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Replacing Power Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Replacing HEATER CONT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Replacing HEATER RELAY Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (for Main Board) . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (in Media Guide F) . . . . . . . .
4.4.7 Replacing MAIN Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.8 Replacing Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.9 Replacing Inlet Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
4-40
4-41
4-42
4-44
4-46
4-48
4-49
4-53
4-55
4.5 Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

4.5.1 Replacing Heater Junction Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.6 Replacing X Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.6.1 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.6.2 Replacing PF Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.6.3 Replacing PF Encoder Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.6.4 Replacing PF_ENC Scale, PF Speed Reduction Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.6.5 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4.6.6 Replacing Lever Up Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.6.7 Replacing Heater, Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.6.8 Replacing Suction Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.6.9 Replacing Platen Non-Reflective Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.6.10 Replacing Media Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.6.11 Replacing Flushing Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.6.12 Replacing Flushing Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.7 Replacing Y Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.7.1 Replacing Steel Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.7.2 Replacing CR Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.7.3 Replacing CR Drive Pulley Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.7.4 Replacing T Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4.7.5 Replacing CR Origin Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4.7.6 Replacing CR Driven Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.7.7 Replacing Steel Bearer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4.7.8 Replacing CR_FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4.7.9 Replacing Pressure Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4.7.10 Replacing Ink Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
4.8 Replacing Cursor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.8.1 Releasing Head Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.8.2 Removing CR Board Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
4.8.3 Replacing CR Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
4.8.4 Replacing CR Encoder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4.8.5 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4.8.6 Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
4.8.7 Removing Print Head Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
4.8.8 Replacing Damper Assembly L_Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
4.8.9 Replacing Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.8.10 Replacing Head FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4.8.11 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
4.9 Replacing Maintenance Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.1 Removing Maintenance Inner Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.2 Replacing Cleaner Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.3 Replacing Maintenance Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-120
4-120
4-121
4-122
4.10 Replacing IH Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.1 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.2 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.3 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.4 Replacing Cartridge Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.5 Replacing Two-Way Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.6 Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.7 Replacing Sub-Tank Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-129
4-129
4-132
4-136
4-136
4-137
4-139
4-139
4.11 Replacing Leg Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

4.11.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
4.12 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
4.12.1 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side. . . . . . . 4-144
4.12.2 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_R Side . . . . . . 4-145
4.13 Replacing Winding Unit Section (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.1 Removing Tension Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.2 Removing Take-up Holding Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.3 Removing Take-up Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.4 Replacing Scroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.5 Replacing VJ Take-up CNT Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take-up Motor Assembly . . . . .
4-146
4-146
4-146
4-148
4-150
4-152
4-159
4-162
5 Self-Diagnosis Mode
5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Operation Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Fan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
History Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Head Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.7 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.7.1 Head Nozzle Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.7.2 Skew Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.7.4 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.7.6 Side Margin Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.7.7 Test Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.7.8 HeadWash Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.8 Cleaning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.10 Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.11 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.12 Servo Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.13 Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.13.5 General Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.14 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.15 ExControl Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.15.1 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15.2 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15.3 Mist Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15.4 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15.5 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-72
5-73
5-73
5-76
5-77
5-77
5.16 PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
6 Maintenance Mode 2
6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1 Counter Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-7
6-7
Adjustment
7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.2 Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Working with Dedicated Network Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3.1 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.3 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.3.5 Firmware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.6 Sending Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.3.8 RTC Date & Time Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.4 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.4.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
10
7.6 CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

7.6.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.6.2 Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.7 Head Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.7.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.8 PG Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.8.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.9 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.9.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.10 P_REAR Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.10.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Periodical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.1 Periodic Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.2 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Part Life Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4 Jigs and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4.1 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.5 Lubrication/Bonding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.6 Transportation of Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2.1 Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
11
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.3 Printing Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.4 Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.5 Online Function Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.6 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.7 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-30
9-30
9-40
9-42
9-61
9-64
9-66
9-68
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Maintenance Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.4 Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
12
1.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2
Warnings, Cautions and Notes.............................................................. 1- 2
1.3
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................ 1- 3
1.4
Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 1- 9

1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels......................................................... 1-9
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels...................................... 1-10
1-1
Rev.-01
1.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the meaning of safety terms for personnel who installs, operates, or maintains this
equipment, important safety instructions, and the warning labels attached to the equipment.
WARNING
Make sure to follow all instructions and warnings on this manual when installing, operating,
or maintaining the equipment.
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Safety terms in this manual and the contents of warning labels attached to the printer are categorized into the
following three types depending on the degree of risk (or the scale of accident).
Read the following explanations carefully, and follow the instructions in this manual.
Table 1-1 Safety Terms Descriptions
Safety terms
Details
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
DANGER
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

whole or part of the product
NOTE
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

product
Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the printer
TIP
Indicates prohibited operations
Indicates required operations
Indicates reference page in this manual
Rev.-01
1-2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions

General safety instructions that must be observed to use the equipment safely are explained below.
WARNING
Do not install this printer in the following locations:Doing so may result in the printer
tipping or falling over and causing injury.
Unstable surfaces
Angled place
Areas subject to vibration by other equipment
Do not stand on or place heavy objects on your printer. Doing so may result in the
printer tipping or falling over and causing injury.
Do not cover the ventilation hole of your printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table
cloth. Doing so may result in fire.
Do not place the printer in humid and dusty areas. Doing so may result in electrical
shock or fire.
Do not use damaged power supply cables. Doing so may cause electric shock or
fires.
Do not connect or disconnect the power supply plug with wet hands. Doing so may
cause electric shock.
Make sure that the following is performed before parts replacement.
Turn off the power of the printer.
Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
Do not connect ground lines to the following locations.
Gas piping
There will be a possibility of causing fires or exploding.
Phone ground lines and lightning rods
A large current may flow if there is a lightning strike.
Water piping and faucets
If a part of the piping is plastic, it will not serve as a ground.
During heater operation, do not place flammable objects on top of the platen. Doing
so may cause fires.
Do not spill flammable fluids on the platen. Doing may cause fires.
1-3
Rev.-01
Do not insert or drop metal objects or flammable objects inside the printer through
openings such as air holes. Doing so may cause electric shock or fires.
If foreign objects or fluids such as water enter the product internals, do not use the
unit as is. Doing so may cause electric shock or fires. Turn off the power supply
switch immediately, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
Make sure to always use the provided power supply cable. If a power supply cable
other than the one supplied with the unit is used, it may cause electric shock or fires.
Always use the specified power supply (AC100V-120V or AC220V-240V). If a
power supply that is outside specifications is used, it may cause electric shock or
fires.
Supply power directly from a power supply outlet (AC100V-120V or AC 220V240V). Do not use extensions or splitters. Doing so may cause electric shock or
fires.
Always use the dedicated power plug with ground terminal, and make sure to
connect the ground to a ground line. If the ground line is not connected, it can cause
electric shock or fires.
Waste fluid produced from the printer corresponds to waste oil (waste ink) in
industrial waste (out of the 19 business related items). A proper waste fluid
processing is required by law based on the industrial waste processing law and
regulations of individual local governments. Please contract a waste fluid
processing company for disposal.
Rev.-01
1-4
CAUTION
Assembling and disassembling of the printer are possible only for the parts that
disassembling procedures are shown in this manual. Do not disassemble any frame
parts or parts that disassembling procedures are not shown in this manual.
Doing so may cause trouble that cannot be restored, as the printer is originally
assembled in the factory with a high accuracy of 1/100 mm.
Do not touch the elements on the circuit board with bare hands.
Doing so may cause static electricity and break the elements.
Do not press the transparent film on the damper assembly with your hands. Doing so
may discharge the ink filled inside the damper assembly.
Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the damper assembly.
Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get any
dust.
There are some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from the
tube outlet onto the printer or items close to the printer.
If you need to operate the printer with the cover removed for maintenance, be careful
not to get hurt by the driving parts.
Never lube the printer mechanism with lube other than that designated by MUTOH.
Doing so may damage the parts or shorten the lifetime.
If the power board assembly needs to be removed, remove the power cable and wait
for 5 minutes or more before taking it out; this will discharge the residual electrical
charge of the electrolytic capacitor.
When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on a MAIN board assembly
connector, make sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or short circuit the inner
terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
When connecting or removing the FFC type cables (tape wire) on the main board
assembly connector, always insert or remove the cables perpendicularly into or from
the connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or short circuit the inner
terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance
work.
Maintenance must be done by more than two person for the following work.
When disassembling or reassembling the product and the dedicated stand
When packing the printer for transportation
1-5
Rev.-01
When handling power supply cables, be careful for the following:

Do not modify the power supply cable.
Do not place heavy objects on top of the power supply cable.
Do not excessively bend, twist or pull on the power supply cable.
Do not route the power supply cable near heater devices.
When handling the power supply plug, be careful for the following: If handled
improperly, it will be a cause for fires.
Do not insert the power supply plug when it is dusty or when there are any foreign
objects attached to it.
Insert the power supply plug all the way to the base of the pins.
When opening or closing the front cover and maintenance cover, be careful not to
get fingers caught.
When handling the ink cartridge, be careful so that the ink does not come into
contact with eyes or skin. If the ink comes into contact with skin or the eyes, wash
off immediately with water. If left alone, it can cause bloodshot eyes or light
inflammations. If there is an abnormal condition, consult a doctor immediately.
Do not disassemble the ink cartridge. If disassembled, there will be a danger of the
ink coming into contact with the eyes or skin.
During initialization operation of the product, do not operate the media set lever. The
print head section and pressure roller sections may interfere with one another, and
lead to damage of the unit.
Do not touch the media guide during printing. The media guide will be extremely hot,
and may cause burns.
During operation of the winding unit, be careful not to get fingers caught in the drive
section.
When cutting roll media, be careful for the following: If mishandled, there is a
possibility of cutting fingers or hands on the cutter blade.
When holding the media, do not place fingers on top of the media cut groove.
Move the cutter blade slowly along the media cut groove.
Excluding the locations specified below, do not use volatile chemicals such as jet
wash fluid, thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. Doing so can cause damage to the unit.
Inside of maintenance cover
Print head surface
Be careful so that no moisture enters inside the product. If moisture enters the
product, electrical circuits inside the product may short.
When replacing the flushing box absorption material, take appropriate care so that
the waste fluid is not spilled. If the waste fluid adheres to the grid roller, the grid roller
surface may be intruded, and cause an adverse effect to media feeding.
Rev.-01
1-6
When cleaning the cleaning wiper

Do not touch the cleaning wiper and head cap unit.
Oil becoming attached may make it impossible to perform proper head cleaning.
Always use a clean stick, and wipe off with a dry cloth.
If water, etc. comes into contact with the clean stick, it may cause the print head
to become clogged.
Do not reuse the clean stick.
Any attached dust, etc. may damage the head.
When cleaning the outer perimeter of the print head
Never touch the nozzle surface of the print head.
Doing so may damage the print head.
Do not touch the tip of the clean stick.
Oil becoming attached may damage the print head.
Never apply water, etc. on the tip of the clean stick.
Doing so may damage the print head.
Do not reuse the clean stick.
Any attached dust, etc. may damage the print head.
Do not place the product on an incline, stand against another object, or flip upside
down. Doing so may spill the ink inside the product. Also, it will not be possible to
guarantee proper operation after moving.
When unpacking or moving the product, make sure to always work with 2 or more
persons.
When taking the product out of the packaging box, always remove the vinyl bag, and
hold the side of the product. If lifted while still in the vinyl bag, there will be a danger
of the product slipping out of one's hands, and falling and becoming damaged.
When not using the product for extended periods of time, always disconnect the
power supply plug from the wall outlet for safety.
Always connect the ground line to a ground line that satisfies the following
specifications:
Ground terminal of the power supply socket
A ground line where a copper piece is buried over 650mm or more into the
ground.
A ground terminal for which class D grounding work has been performed.
Make sure to ventilate the work area. The odor may cause nausea, and may
potentially cause fires.
When performing the following work, make sure to always work with 2 or more
persons.
Setting the winding unit
Immediately after completing printing, the media guide and platen will be extremely
hot. Perform any work after the media guide and platen have adequately cooled.
1-7
Rev.-01
When performing cleaning, make sure to turn the power supply OFF, and pull out
the power supply plug from the power outlet.
Make sure that the product maintains a horizontal position when moving.
Before performing installation work for various options, make sure to perform the
following.
Turn the power supply of the product OFF.
Pull out the power supply plug from the power outlet.
Disconnect cables connected to the product.
If work is performed with these connected, damage to the product or computer
may result.
Touch the metallic sections of the product to remove any static electricity charged
in clothing or on one's body.
The electronic parts such as the memory, etc. are susceptible to damage by static
electricity.
When installing various options, make sure not to touch any elements on the
circuitboard. Elements on the circuitboard become very hot, and may cause burns.
Rev.-01
1-8
1.4 Warning Labels

The handling, attachment locations, and types of warning labels are explained below.
Warning labels are attached to areas where care should be taken. Read and understand the positions and
contents thoroughly before maintenance operation.
1.4.1
Handling the Warning Labels
Make sure to note the following when handling the warning labels.
NOTE
Make sure that all warning labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen clearly,
clean or replace the label.
When cleaning warning labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a solvent or
gasoline.
If a warning label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
1-9
Rev.-01
1.4.2
Locations and Types of Warning Labels
(1) Main Body

The locations of warning labels on the main body are shown below.
4 3 2 1
Rev.-01
1-10
Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels

No.
Warning label type
(Front cover open/close caution)
(Head nozzle drying caution)
(Cleaning caution)
(Steel belt caution)
1-11
Rev.-01
Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels (Continued)

No.
Warning label type
(High temperature caution)
(Electric shock caution)
(Ink handling caution)
(Waste fluid tube handling caution)
Rev.-01
1-12
(2) Winding Unit Section (Optional)

The locations of warning labels on the scroller are shown below.
No.
Warning label type
(Catching caution)
1-13
Rev.-01
Rev.-01
1-14
2 Product Overview
2 Product Overview
2.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 2- 2
2.2
Features ................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.3
Part Names and Functions..................................................................... 2- 3

2.3.1 Front Section ................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section .................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.3 Winding Unit Section (Optional)..................................................... 2-6
2.3.4 Operation Panel ............................................................................. 2-7
2.4
Plotter Status......................................................................................... 2- 10
2.4.1 Normal ......................................................................................... 2-10
2.4.2 Setup Menu ................................................................................. 2-10
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function ............................................................... 2-10
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode ...................................................................... 2-10
2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language ........................................................... 2-11
2-1
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the features, part names, and functions of the plotter.
2.2 Features
The features of the plotter are explained below.
(1) Fast Print

This model uses the new head prints images faster.
Realizing printing width of 1615 mm in uni-direction printing mode.
(2) Variety of Print Media

The height of the print head position can be set high/low, so that this model can print on the media of which
thickness is between 0.08 and 0.3 mm.
(3) Vivid Color Reproduction

For Vivid color reproduction, this model has high-capacity (220 ml) 4 color ink cartridges with exclusive
smart IC chip on it. With the IC chip, you can manage the ink level of the cartridges and can get better
productivity.
Also, With variable dot mechanism, this model enhances the level of color expression.
(4) Multi-Heater System

The media-heating system which have been equipped to PJ series is changed to match the solvent ink. There
are 3 heaters on Pre / Platen / After positions and improved the ink fixability and drying property.
(5) Effective Utilization of Media

The JOG function for setting print start position on purpose is equipped. You can print on the margin(s) of a
media which is already printed.
Rev.-01
2-2
2 Product Overview
2.3 Part Names and Functions

Part names and functions are explained below.
NOTE
For the directions described in this document, refer to the following figure.
Upper
Left
Rear
Front
Right
Lower
2-3
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
2.3.1
Front Section
13
7
13
10
10
9
6
4
11
12
12
Table 2-1 Part Names and Functions of Front Section

No.
Name
Function
Media set lever
Used for fixing or releasing the media

Lower the lever to fix the media
Lower the lever further to fix the media firmly
Used to improve the accuracy of media feeding
* The accuracy of media feeding may decline depending on media.
Raise the lever to release the media
Operation panel
Used to set operational conditions, the status of the plotter, and other
functions
Front cover
Keeps the operator safe from the drive parts of the plotter while it is
operating. Opened and closed when media is set or jammed. It is normally
closed.
Waste fluid tank
Used to store waste ink discharged from print head
Stand
Used to set the plotter on the level surface of the floor
Media guide
Used to feed media smoothly when setting media and printing

The heater (after-heater) for drying ink is installed inside.
Platen
Installed inside the front cover

The heater (platen heater) for drying ink is installed.
Pressure roller

Used to press the media from above and hold it when printing
Rev.-01
2-4
2 Product Overview
Table 2-1 Part Names and Functions of Front Section (Continued)

No.
Name
Function
Media cut groove
Installed inside of the front cover

Used to cut printed media straight
10
Maintenance cover
Used to protect users from the mechanical parts inside the plotter in the
following cases:
- Cleaning the cleaning wiper
- Cleaning around the print head
This cover must usually be closed.
11
Waste fluid cock
Opened/closed when discharging waste fluid from waste fluid tank. This
cover must usually be closed.
12
Adjuster
Used to keep the plotter level
13
Media holding plate

By attaching media holder plates to both sides of the media, it is possible
to prevent media warp.
2.3.2
Rear Section
67
Table 2-2 Part Names and Functions of Rear Section

No.
Name
Function
Roll media holders
Used to load the roll media

Include flanges where roll media is attached, and the levers that fix the roll
media holders.
Media feed slot
Insert media from here when feeding media
Ink cartridge slot
Holds the ink cartridge
2-5
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
Table 2-2 Part Names and Functions of Rear Section (Continued)

No.
Name
Function
Media guide
Used for feeding media smoothly when the media is set or printed.
The heater (pre-heater) to warm media is installed.
AC inlet
Used for connecting the power cable
USB connector
Not used for this printer
Network interface
connector
Connector to connect a network interface cable
2.3.3
Winding Unit Section (Optional)
6
8
5
3
1
4 7
Table 2-3 Part Names and Functions of Winding Unit Section

No.
Name
Function
Winding unit
Used to take up printed media
Absorbing roller
Used to guide printed media to the scroller
Scroller receiver
Set the scroller for the winding unit here
Scroller release lever
Used to poise the scroller when rotating the scroller manually
Scroller
Used to take up printed media
Scroller height
adjustment screw
Adjusts the height of scroller receiver
Rev.-01
2-6
2 Product Overview
Table 2-3 Part Names and Functions of Winding Unit Section (Continued)
No.
Name
Function
Scroller horizontal
position adjustment
screw
Adjusts the horizontal position of the scroller
Power switch
Turns the plotter on/off
2.3.4
Operation Panel
The operation panel is used to set operational conditions, display the status of the plotter, and set other
functions.
The names and functions of the operation keys and status lamps are explained below.
TIP
Operation manual
8, 9
10
17
13
14
15
16
6
11
12
1
2-7
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
(1) Operation Keys

NOTE
Some keys have multiple functions and names depending on the plotter status (normal or setup menu
display). See "2.4 Plotter Status" p.2-10 for more details.
No.
Name
Normal
Setup menu display
[Menu] key
Changes the LCD monitor display to Changes the setup menu display
setup menu status.
status to normal status.
[Enter] key
- Selects the menu to be set and shifts

to the next hierarchy.
- Determines and saves the parameter
value.
[Cleaning] key
If held down for 2 seconds or more,

starts cleaning the plotter head.
[Cancel] key
- During plotting: Terminates printing

forcibly and deletes 1 file of
remaining data.
- During reception/analysis: Deletes
the data that has been already
received/analyzed and ignores 1 file
of data received after that.
- During ink drying time wait status:
Releases the ink drying time wait
status and ejects the media.
- Returns to the previous menu

hierarchy. Changed parameter values
are disabled.
- Changes the setup menu display
status to normal status.
[<] key
Sets the media type.

- The lamp for the type that is set
lights on (green).
-Changes the setting value in the

following menu:
Origin setting menu
[Nozzle Check] key
If held down for 2 seconds or more,

starts checking the plotter nozzle.
[>] key
Sets the cleaning mode.

- The lamp for the cleaning mode
lights on (green).
Displays lower rank menu items.
[Backward ] key
Feeds the media in the reverse

direction.
[+] key
-Changes the menu in forward order.

-Changes the setting value in forward
order.
-Increases the value when inputting
setting value.
Rev.-01
2-8
No.
7
2 Product Overview
Name
Normal
Setup menu display
[Forward ] key
Feeds the media in the forward

direction.
[-] key
- Changes the menu in the reverse

direction.
- Decreases the value when inputting
values.
[Power] key
Turns the plotter on and off.
Turns the plotter on and off.
(2) LCD Monitor and Status Lamps

No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Name
Color
Power lamp
Green
Data lamp
High lamp
Low lamp
Wave lamp
Green
Green
Red
Red
Strong lamp
Green
LCD monitor
Green
Function
On
The plotter is switched on.
Blinking
An error has occurred. The contents will be displayed on the

LCD monitor.
Off
The plotter is switched off.
Orange On
Fine & S.Fine

lamp
Normal lamp
Status
- The plotter is analyzing received data.

- The plotter is printing data.
Blinking
The plotter is receiving data.
Off
The plotter is not receiving, analyzing or printing data.
On
The print head height is set to High position.
Off
The print head height is set to Low position.
On
The print head height is set to Low position.
Off
The print head height is set to High position.
On
The effect menu is set to Wave.
Off
The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
On
The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
Off
The effect menu is set to Wave.
On
- The cleaning mode is set to Strong.

- When the Normal lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy.
Off
- The cleaning mode is set to Normal.
On
- The cleaning mode is set to Normal.

- When the Strong lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy quality.
Off
The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
This monitor displays the operation status and error

messages of the plotter.
2-9
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
2.4 Plotter Status

The status of the plotter is explained below.
2.4.1
Normal
Indicates that the plotter can print when media is loaded.

Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.2
Setup Menu
Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.

The settings required for normal printing are usually made on the plotter driver or application, but can also
be made using the operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.3
Self-Diagnosis Function
Indicates that each settings concerning printing using the operation panel. Names and functions of the
operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"5 Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-1
2.4.4
Maintenance Mode
Indicates that each setup concerning to the life counter on this plotter can be operated by using the operation
panel. Names and functions of the operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"6 Maintenance Mode 2" p.6-1
Rev.-01
2-10
2.4.5
2 Product Overview
Selecting Panel Language
This section describes how to select the language displayed in the operation panel.
Follow the steps below to select the language.
NOTE
You can choose either English or Japanese.
1. Press [Power] key in the operation panel while

pressing [Cancel] key.
2. Press [Setting/value +] key or [Setting/value -]

key in the operation panel to modify the value.
3. To save the modified value, press [Enter] key in

the operation panel.
2-11
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
Rev.-01
2-12
3 Specifications
3 Specifications
3.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 3- 2
3.2
Product Specifications ........................................................................... 3- 2
3.3
Interface Specifications.......................................................................... 3- 4
3.3.1 Network Interface Specifications.................................................... 3-4
3.4
Options/Supplies List ............................................................................. 3- 4

3.4.1 Options .......................................................................................... 3-4
3.4.2 Supplies ......................................................................................... 3-4
3.5
Choosing a Place for the Printer .......................................................... 3- 6
3-1
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the specifications of the product, optional parts, and supplies. Installation environment
requirements are also explained.
3.2 Product Specifications

(1) Main Unit Specifications
Item
Specifications
Model name
VJ-1604
Plotting method
On-demand piezo drive
Motor driving method
Firmware servo / DC motor drive
Media feeding method
Multi-point pressure grid roller method
Media fixing method
Pressurizing roller manual-down method
Media supply and Roll media

ejection
Rear feeding / front ejection
Roll media outer diameter
150 mm (5.9 in.) or less
Roll media weight
30 kg (66 lb.) or less
Maximum media length
50 m (164 ft.)
Maximum media width
1625 mm (63.9 in.)
Maximum media thickness
0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
Maximum plot length
18 m (59.1 ft.)
Maximum plot width
1615 mm (63.6 in.)
Plotting margins
Top: 15 mm, Bottom: 5 mm, Left: 5-25 mm, Right: 5-25 mm
Media cutting method
Horizontal manual cut
Head height adjustment
2 levels: Normal / High
Distance accuracy
The larger value either 0.25 mm or 0.1% of moving distance

Used media: Roll MF-3G
Plot length: 1219 mm (4 ft.)
Operating temperature: 22C to 30C (71.6F to 86F)
Operating humidity: 40% to 60%
PG: Low
Plot mode: Graphics1
Right angle accuracy
0.1 mm or less against the moving distance (500.0 mm)

Used media: Roll MF-3G
Operating temperature: 22C to 30C (71.6F to 86F)
Operating humidity: 40% to 60%
Plot mode: Graphics1
CPU
64Bit RISC CPU
Memory
Rev.-01
256MB
3-2
3 Specifications
Item
Specifications
Command
MH-RTL (RTL-PASS)
Interface
Ink
Network Interface (Ethernet IEEE802.3)
Supply method
Cartridge
Environmental conditions
Tube supply from four separate cartridges

Black, cyan, magenta, yellow: 220 ml 5 ml for each color
Temperature
Humidity
Operation environment
20C (68F) to 32C (89.6F)
40% to 60%, with no condensation
Plotting accuracy warranty range
22C (71.6F) to 30C (86F)
2C/hour or less
5%/hour or less
Without ink
-20C (-4F) to 60C (140F)
With ink
-10C (14F) to 40C (104F)
Rate of change
Storage
environment
Power source
Voltage
AC 90 - 132V
Frequency
50Hz / 60Hz 1Hz
Power
consumption
During Plotting
1200W (when heater is ON)
During standby
40W or less (when standby heater is OFF)
Outer dimensions
Height
1262 mm (49.7 in.) * including dedicated stand
Width
2698 mm (106 in.)
Depth
845 mm (33.3 in.)
Weight
173 kg (380.6 lb.) * including dedicated stand
3-3
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
3.3 Interface Specifications

This section explains the specification of the interfaces Supported for this printer.
3.3.1
Network Interface Specifications

Item
Specifications
Network type
Ethernet IEEE802.3
Network I/F
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Auto-switching

(RJ-45 connector twist pair cable)
MDI / MDI-X Auto-switching
Corresponding
protocol
TCP/IP
3.4 Options/Supplies List

3.4.1
Options
TIP
For more information about the winding unit (optional), contact the following:
MUTOH distributor
MUTOH sales office
3.4.2
Supplies
(1) Ink Cartridge

Name
Model
Sales units
Ink cartridge K (Black: 220 ml 5 ml)
VJ-MSINK3-BK220
1 box (1 piece per box)
Ink cartridge C (Cyan: 220 ml 5 ml)
VJ-MSINK3-CY220
Ink cartridge M (Magenta: 220 ml 5 ml)
VJ-MSINK3-MA220
Ink cartridge Y (Yellow: 220 ml 5 ml)
VJ-MSINK3-YE220
Cleaning cartridge (220 ml 5 ml)
VJ-MSINK3-CL220
Rev.-01
3-4
3 Specifications
(2) Other Supplies

Name
Waste ink bottle
3-5
Model
Sales units
RJ8000-HET
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
3.5
Choosing a Place for the Printer

WARNING
Do not place the printer in a location under the following conditions. Doing so may cause
the product to fall, become damaged, or cause injury.
Unstable surfaces
Slanted areas
Locations that are subject to vibration from other product
Do not stand on the printer or place any heavy objects on it.
Doing so may cause it to fall over, become damaged, or cause injury.
Do not cover the ventilation hole of the printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth.
Doing so could prevent the printer from ventilating and cause fire.
Keep the printer away from humid and dusty areas. Failure to do so may result in
electrical shock or fire.
(1) Installation Environment Requirements

Choose a place for printer installation following the requirements of the table below.
Table 3-1 Installation Environment Requirements List
Floor loading capability
Electrical
specification
s
Voltage
AC 90-132 V
Frequency
50/60Hz 1Hz
Capacity
Main side: 8.5 A, Heater side: 8.5A
Environmental conditions
Temperature
Humidity
Operation
environment
20C (68F) - 32C (89.6F)
40% - 60%, with no condensation
Plotting accuracy
warranty range
22C (71.6F) - 30C (86F)
40% - 60%, with no condensation
2C/hour or less
5%/hour or less
-20C (-4F) - 60C (104F)
20% - 80%
No condensation (when ink is not
charged)
Rate of change
Storage
environment
Rev.-01
2940Pa (300kgf/m2) or over
3-6
3 Specifications
NOTE
Avoid the following temperature and humidity conditions. Otherwise, Plotted images may appear
differently from what you expect.
Places where sudden changes in temperature and humidity are expected, even though the
condition is within the range specified
Places where direct sunlight or excessive lighting are expected
Places where air conditioners blow directly
MUTOH recommends that the printer should be installed where air conditioning can be adjusted
easily.
(2) Required Space

Install the printer on a flat surface that fulfills the following conditions.
The place to install printer with the dedicated stand should have enough loading capacity.
NOTE
For the printer and the dedicated stand, refer to"3.2 Product Specifications" p.3-2.
a= 600 mm
b=1000 mm
c=1000 mm
d=1000 mm
e=1550 mm
e
a
d
b
* Do not use VJ-1604 without stand.
3-7
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
Rev.-01
3-8
4 Parts Replacement
4 Parts Replacement
4.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 4- 6
4.2
Removing Covers ................................................................................... 4- 7

4.2.1 Removing Panel Cover .................................................................. 4-9
4.2.2 Removing Maintenance Cover....................................................... 4-9
4.2.3 Removing Maintenance Cover U ................................................. 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Side Maintenance Cover R......................................... 4-11
4.2.5 Removing Side Maintenance Cover L ......................................... 4-12
4.2.6 Removing Side Top Cover R ....................................................... 4-12
4.2.7 Removing Side Top Cover L........................................................ 4-14
4.2.8 Removing Rear Side Cover ......................................................... 4-15
4.2.9 Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper) ............................................. 4-17
4.2.10 Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle) ............................................ 4-18
4.2.11 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower) ............................................. 4-19
4.2.12 Removing Switch Cover R ........................................................... 4-19
4.2.13 Removing Switch Cover L............................................................ 4-20
4.2.14 Removing Front Cover................................................................. 4-21
4.2.15 Removing Rear Top Cover .......................................................... 4-21
4.2.16 Removing Top Cover ................................................................... 4-23
4.2.17 Removing Media Guide F (Upper) ............................................... 4-24
4.2.18 Removing Media Guide R (Upper)............................................... 4-27
4.2.19 Removing Media Guide R (Lower)............................................... 4-29
4.3
Replacing Covers.................................................................................. 4- 30
4.3.1 Replacing Panel Unit ................................................................... 4-30
4-1
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.3.2 Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor ......................................... 4-31

4.3.3 Replacing Front Cover Sensor ..................................................... 4-32
4.3.4 Replacing Front Cover Gear, Damper Gear (Sintered) ................ 4-35
4.4
Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section) ...............................................4- 39

4.4.1 Opening Board Box 64 ................................................................. 4-40
4.4.2 Replacing Power Board Assembly ............................................... 4-41
4.4.3 Replacing HEATER CONT Board ................................................ 4-42
4.4.4 Replacing HEATER RELAY Board............................................... 4-44
4.4.5 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (for Main Board)............ 4-46
4.4.6 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (in Media Guide F) ........ 4-48
4.4.7 Replacing MAIN Board ................................................................. 4-49
4.4.8 Replacing Fuse............................................................................. 4-53
4.4.9 Replacing Inlet Assembly ............................................................. 4-55
4.5
Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section) .................................4- 58

4.5.1 Replacing Heater Junction Board Assembly ................................ 4-58
4.6
Replacing X Rail Section ......................................................................4- 60

4.6.1 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt ............................................ 4-60
4.6.2 Replacing PF Motor Assembly ..................................................... 4-61
4.6.3 Replacing PF Encoder Assembly ................................................. 4-63
4.6.4 Replacing PF_ENC Scale, PF Speed Reduction Pulley .............. 4-64
4.6.5 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly ......................................... 4-65
4.6.6 Replacing Lever Up Sensor.......................................................... 4-67
4.6.7 Replacing Heater, Thermistor....................................................... 4-68
4.6.8 Replacing Suction Fan ................................................................. 4-76
Rev.-01
4-2
4 Parts Replacement
4.6.9 Replacing Platen Non-Reflective Tape ........................................ 4-78

4.6.10 Replacing Media Holder............................................................... 4-78
4.6.11 Replacing Flushing Tray .............................................................. 4-80
4.6.12 Replacing Flushing Absorber....................................................... 4-82
4.7
Replacing Y Rail Section...................................................................... 4- 84

4.7.1 Replacing Steel Belt..................................................................... 4-84
4.7.2 Replacing CR Motor Assembly .................................................... 4-87
4.7.3 Replacing CR Drive Pulley Assembly .......................................... 4-89
4.7.4 Replacing T Fence....................................................................... 4-91
4.7.5 Replacing CR Origin Sensor........................................................ 4-94
4.7.6 Replacing CR Driven Pulley......................................................... 4-96
4.7.7 Replacing Steel Bearer ................................................................ 4-97
4.7.8 Replacing CR_FFC...................................................................... 4-99
4.7.9 Replacing Pressure Roller ......................................................... 4-101
4.7.10 Replacing Ink Tube .................................................................... 4-102
4.8
Replacing Cursor Section .................................................................. 4- 105

4.8.1 Releasing Head Lock................................................................. 4-105
4.8.2 Removing CR Board Cover ....................................................... 4-106
4.8.3 Replacing CR Board Assembly.................................................. 4-106
4.8.4 Replacing CR Encoder Assembly.............................................. 4-108
4.8.5 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Assembly ..................................... 4-109
4.8.6 Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly..................................... 4-110
4.8.7 Removing Print Head Cover ...................................................... 4-110
4.8.8 Replacing Damper Assembly L_Assy........................................ 4-112
4-3
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.9 Replacing Print Head.................................................................. 4-114

4.8.10 Replacing Head FFC .................................................................. 4-116
4.8.11 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly ....................................... 4-118
4.9
Replacing Maintenance Section.........................................................4- 120

4.9.1 Removing Maintenance Inner Cover .......................................... 4-120
4.9.2 Replacing Cleaner Head ............................................................ 4-121
4.9.3 Replacing Maintenance Assembly ............................................. 4-122
4.10 Replacing IH Section ...........................................................................4- 129

4.10.1 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly .............................................. 4-129
4.10.2 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle .......................................... 4-132
4.10.3 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable ....................................... 4-136
4.10.4 Replacing Cartridge Holder Assembly........................................ 4-136
4.10.5 Replacing Two-Way Valve ......................................................... 4-137
4.10.6 Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly ........................ 4-139
4.10.7 Replacing Sub-Tank Assembly .................................................. 4-139
4.11 Replacing Leg Section ........................................................................4- 142
4.11.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Bottle ..................................................... 4-142
4.12 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly ............................................4- 144
4.12.1 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side ..... 4-144
4.12.2 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_R Side .... 4-145
4.13 Replacing Winding Unit Section (Option) .........................................4- 146
4.13.1 Removing Tension Arm .............................................................. 4-146
4.13.2 Removing Take-up Holding Plate............................................... 4-146
4.13.3 Removing Take-up Cover........................................................... 4-148
Rev.-01
4-4
4 Parts Replacement
4.13.4 Replacing Scroller...................................................................... 4-150

4.13.5 Replacing VJ Take-up CNT Board Assembly ............................ 4-152
4.13.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor .................................. 4-159
4.13.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take-up Motor Assembly.. 4-162
4-5
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on removal and replacement of service parts.
WARNING
Before starting part replacement, always perform the following operations.

Turn OFF the machine power.
Remove the power plug from the outlet.
Otherwise, you may suffer electric shock or the system circuit may be damaged.
Remove any cables connected to the plotter.
Otherwise, the plotter may be damaged.
CAUTION
The components in the plotter can be disassembled only if so instructed in this manual. Do
not disassemble the frame components and other components that are not instructed to
disassemble in the manual.
The plotter has been assembled in the MUTOH factory with extremely high precision up to
1/100mm. If disassembled inappropriately, it may not restore its normal functionality.
NOTE
After replacing any service parts, perform necessary lubrication and bonding following the
instructions in section "8.5 Lubrication/Bonding" p.8-6.
Rev.-01
4-6
4 Parts Replacement
4.2 Removing Covers

This section describes the procedures to replace covers.
11
10
2
3
12
13
19
17
18
16
15
13
9
14
20
21
Table 4-1 Cover Component List

No.
Part name
Panel cover
Maintenance cover R
Maintenance cover U_R
Side maintenance cover R
4-7
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-1 Cover Component List (Continued)

No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Side top cover R
Maintenance cover L
Maintenance cover U_L
Side top cover L
Side maintenance cover L
10
Front cover
11
Acrylic plate
12
Media guide F (upper)
13
Board box 64
14
Rear side cover
15
Cartridge cover (lower)
16
Cartridge cover (middle)
17
Cartridge cover (upper)
18
Rear top cover
19
Top cover
20
Media guide R (upper)
21
Media guide R (lower)
4-8
4.2.1
4 Parts Replacement
Removing Panel Cover
1. Open the maintenance cover R.

2. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the panel cover.
1
No.
Part name
Panel cover
Screws that retain the panel cover

(pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M4 8)
3. Remove the panel cover.

4. To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
4.2.2
Removing Maintenance Cover
NOTE
The procedure to remove the maintenance cover R is the same as the one for the maintenance cover L.
1. Open the maintenance cover.

2. Lift up the maintenance cover.
3. Remove the maintenance cover.
4-9
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
No.
1
Part name
Maintenance cover
4.2.3
Removing Maintenance Cover U
NOTE
The procedure to remove the maintenance cover U_R is the same as the one for the maintenance
cover U_L.

"4.2.2 Removing Maintenance Cover" p.4-9
Rev.-01
4-10
4 Parts Replacement
2. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the maintenance cover U.

2
No.
Part name
Maintenance cover U
Screws that retain the maintenance cover U

3. Remove the maintenance cover U.

4.2.4
Removing Side Maintenance Cover R
1. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the side maintenance cover R.
1
No.
Part name
Side maintenance cover R
Screws that retain the side maintenance cover R

4-11
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Lift up and remove the side maintenance cover R.

4.2.5
Removing Side Maintenance Cover L
1. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the side maintenance cover L.
1
No.
Part name
Side maintenance cover L
Screws that retain the side maintenance cover L

2. Lift up and remove the side maintenance cover L.

4.2.6
Removing Side Top Cover R
NOTE
Before removing the side top cover R, close the front cover.
1. Remove the side maintenance cover R.

"4.2.4 Removing Side Maintenance Cover R" p.4-11
Rev.-01
4-12
4 Parts Replacement
2. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the side top cover R.
1
No.
Part name
Side top cover R
Screws that retain the side top cover R

3. Remove the side top cover R to the direction shown in the picture below.
4-13
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.7
Removing Side Top Cover L
NOTE
Before removing the side top cover L, close the front cover.
1. Remove the side maintenance cover L.

"4.2.5 Removing Side Maintenance Cover L" p.4-12
2. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the side top cover L.
1
No.
Part name
Side top cover L
Screws that retain the side top cover L

3. Remove the side top cover L to the direction shown in the picture below.
Rev.-01
4-14
4.2.8
4 Parts Replacement
Removing Rear Side Cover

2. Remove the side top cover L.
"4.2.7 Removing Side Top Cover L" p.4-14
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the rear side cover 3.
1
No.
Part name
Rear side cover 3
Screws that retain the rear side cover 3

(tapping screw M3 8)
Rear side cover
4. Remove the rear side cover 3.
4-15
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the screws (2 pieces) on the lower part of the rear side cover.
1
No.
Part name
Rear side cover
Screws that retain the rear side cover

6. Remove the screws (3 pieces) on the left and right side of the rear side cover.
Rear left view
Rear right view
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Rear side cover
Screws that retain the rear side cover

4-16
4 Parts Replacement
7. Remove the rear side cover.

1
No.
1
Part name
Rear side cover
4.2.9
Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper)
1. Remove the ink cartridge (6 pieces).

2. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the left and right part of the cartridge cover (upper).
2
Rear left view
No.
Rear right view
Part name
Screws that retain the cartridge cover (upper)

4-17
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) on the upper part of the cartridge cover (upper).
2
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the cartridge cover (upper)

4. Remove the cartridge cover (upper).

4.2.10 Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle)

"4.2.9 Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper)" p.4-17
2. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the cartridge cover (middle).
1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Cartridge cover (middle)
Screws that retain the cartridge cover (middle)

4-18
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the cartridge cover (middle).
4.2.11 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower)

1. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the cartridge cover (lower).
2
Left view
No.
Right view
Part name
Cartridge cover (lower)
Screws that retain the cartridge cover (lower)

2. Remove the cartridge cover (lower).

4.2.12 Removing Switch Cover R

1. Remove the side top cover R.
"4.2.6 Removing Side Top Cover R" p.4-12
4-19
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Remove the screws (3 pieces) that retain the switch cover R.

Rear view
Right view
2 2
No.
Part name
Switch cover R
Screws that retain the switch cover R

3. Remove the switch cover R.

4.2.13 Removing Switch Cover L

2. Remove the screws (3 pieces) that retain the switch cover L.
Rear view
No.
Rev.-01
Left view
Part name
Switch cover L
Screws that retain the switch cover L

4-20
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the switch cover L.

4.2.14 Removing Front Cover

CAUTION
Front cover removal must be done by two or more persons.
1. Remove the screws that retain the left and right side of the front cover (4 pieces respectively).
Left view
2 2
Right view
No.
Part name
Front cover
Screws that retain the front cover

(Trusco screw M4 6)
2. Remove the front cover.

4.2.15 Removing Rear Top Cover

CAUTION
Rear top cover removal must be done by 2 or more persons.

"4.2.8 Removing Rear Side Cover" p.4-15
4-21
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement

5. Remove the screws (5 pieces) on the back of the rear top cover.
6. Remove the screws (5 pieces) on the upper side of the rear top cover.
3
No.
Part name
Rear top cover
Screws that retain the rear top cover

Screws that retain the rear top cover

(cup screw M3 8)
7. Remove the rear top cover.

Rev.-01
4-22
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.16 Removing Top Cover

CAUTION
Top cover removal must be done by 2 or more persons.
1. Remove the front cover.

"4.2.14 Removing Front Cover" p.4-21
"4.2.15 Removing Rear Top Cover" p.4-21
3. Remove the screws (5 pieces) that retain the back of the top cover.
Rear view
No.
Part name
Top cover
Screws that retain the top cover

4-23
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the screws (5 pieces) that retain the front of the top cover.
Front view
No.
Part name
Top cover
Screws that retain the top cover

5. Remove the top cover.

4.2.17 Removing Media Guide F (Upper)

CAUTION
Media guide F (upper) removal must be done by 2 or more persons.

"4.2.2 Removing Maintenance Cover" p.4-9
Rev.-01
4-24
4 Parts Replacement
2. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the media guide FR.
1
Right upper view
No.
Lower view
Part name
Media guide FR
Screws that retain the media guide FR

3. Remove the media guide FR.

4. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the media guide FL.
1
Left upper view
No.
Lower view
Part name
Media guide FL
Screws that retain the media guide FL

5. Remove the media guide FL.
4-25
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
6. Remove the screws (5 pieces) that retain the bottom of the media guide F (upper).
2
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the media guide F (upper)

7. Remove the screws (5 pieces) that retain the media guide F (upper).
2
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the media guide F (upper)

(binding small screw M3 6)
8. Lift up the media guide F (upper).
Rev.-01
4-26
4 Parts Replacement
9. Remove the two connectors to the after-heater and the two connectors to the after-thermistor that are
inside the media guide F (upper).
3
No.
Part name
Media guide F (lower)
Connector to the after-thermistor
Connector to the after-heater
10. Remove the media guide F (upper).

4.2.18 Removing Media Guide R (Upper)

CAUTION
Media guide R (upper) removal must be done by 2 or more persons.
1. Remove media.
4-27
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the media guide R (upper).
1
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the media guide R (upper)

3. Push backward the media guide R (upper).

4. Remove the two connectors to the pre-heater and the two connectors to the pre-thermistor that are inside
the media guide R (upper).
1
No.
Part name
Rear top cover
Connector to the pre-thermistor
Connector to the pre-heater
5. Remove the media guide R (upper).

Rev.-01
4-28
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.19 Removing Media Guide R (Lower)

CAUTION
Media guide R (lower) removal must be done by 2 or more persons.
1. Remove the media guide R (upper).

"4.2.18 Removing Media Guide R (Upper)" p.4-27
NOTE
If the roll media holder overlaps the screw holes, displace the roll media holder.
2. Remove the screws (8 pieces) that retain the media guide R (lower).
1
No.
Part name
Media guide R (lower)
Screws that retain the media guide R (lower)

3. Remove the media guide R (lower).

4-29
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.3 Replacing Covers

This section describes the procedures to replace the covers.
4.3.1
Replacing Panel Unit
CAUTION
When replacing the panel unit, first pull out the AC cable.
Power may be turned on depending on how the cable is connected, and that may damage
the board.
When connecting and removing the FFC type cables (panel tape wires), always pull or
push the cables perpendicularly.
Pulling or pushing them slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the
connectors, causing a breakdown of the on-board devices.
The cables can be connected or removed up to 5 times.
1. Remove the panel cover.

"4.2.1 Removing Panel Cover" p.4-9
2. Remove the panel to conversion board tape wire.
3. Release the four panel unit back tabs (4 pieces) from the panel stay.
2
Front view
2 3
No.
Part name
Panel unit
Panel unit tab
Panel stay
Panel FFC
4. Remove the panel unit.

5. Replace the panel unit.
Rev.-01
Rear view
4-30
4.3.2
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor
(1) Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor R

"4.2.3 Removing Maintenance Cover U" p.4-10
2. Detach the connector for the maintenance cover sensor assembly.
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the maintenance cover sensor assembly.
2
No.
Part name
Maintenance cover sensor assembly
Screws that retain the maintenance cover sensor assembly

Connector for the maintenance cover sensor assembly
4. Remove the maintenance cover sensor assembly.

5. Replace the maintenance cover sensor assembly.
TIP
The maintenance cover sensor looks like the following.
Opened
Closed
4-31
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor L

The procedure to replace the maintenance cover sensor L is the same as the one for the maintenance cover
sensor R.
4.3.3
Replacing Front Cover Sensor
(1) R Side
"4.2.12 Removing Switch Cover R" p.4-19
3. Detach the connector for the cover sensor (C) assembly_R.
Rev.-01
4-32
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the cover sensor (C) assembly_R.
2
No.
Part name
Cover sensor (C) assembly_R
Screws that retain the cover sensor (C) assembly_R

(pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M2
12)
Damper cover R
5. Remove the cover sensor (C) assembly_R.

TIP
The cover sensor looks like the following.
Opened
Closed
(2) L Side
"4.2.13 Removing Switch Cover L" p.4-20
3. Detach the connector for the cover sensor (C) assembly_L.
4-33
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the cover sensor (C) assembly_L.
2
No.
Part name
Cover sensor (C) assembly_L
Screws that retain the cover sensor (C) assembly_L

12)
Damper cover L
5. Remove the cover sensor (C) assembly_L.

TIP
The cover sensor looks like the following.
Opened
Rev.-01
Closed
4-34
4.3.4
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Front Cover Gear, Damper Gear (Sintered)
(1) R Side
"4.2.12 Removing Switch Cover R" p.4-19
2. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the switch plate R.
1
No.
Part name
Switch plate R
Screw that retains the switch plate R.

Front cover axis
3. Remove the switch plate.

4. Remove the screws (3 pieces) that retain the damper cover R.
2
No.
1
Part name
Damper cover R
4-35
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the damper cover R

5. Remove the damper cover R.

6. Remove the flange bushing.
2
No.
Part name
Flange bushing
Front cover gear
Front cover axis
Damper gear (sintered)
7. Replace the front cover gear.

8. Replace the damper gear (sintered).
Rev.-01
4-36
4 Parts Replacement
(2) L Side
"4.2.13 Removing Switch Cover L" p.4-20
2. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the switch plate L.
1
No.
Part name
Switch plate L
Screw that retains the switch plate L

Front cover axis
3. Remove the switch plate.

4. Remove the screws (3 pieces) that retain the damper cover L.
2
No.
Part name
Damper cover L
Screws that retain the damper cover L

4-37
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the damper cover L.

6. Remove the flange bushing.
1
No.
Part name
Flange bushing
Front cover gear
Front cover axis
7. Replace the front cover gear.

8. Replace the damper gear (sintered).
Rev.-01
4-38
4 Parts Replacement
4.4 Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section)

This section describes the procedure to replace the power supply or the board in the X rail section.
The boards are arranged as follows.
Inside view of media guide F
No.
Inside view of board box 64
Part name
HEATER RELAY board assembly
HEATER-CONT board assembly
Power board assembly
Main board assembly
4-39
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.4.1
Opening Board Box 64
1. Remove the AC inlet cables (2 pieces), and the other cables (LAN, USB).
2. Remove the screws (5 pieces) that retain the board box 64.
CAUTION
If you remove the screws that retain the board box 64, the box opens downwards because
of it's weight. Remove the last screw while holding the box by hand, or you may be injured.
Right view
Left view
Rear view
1
2
No.
Part name
Board box 64
Screws that retain the board box 64

3. Open the board box 64 downwards.

4. To close the unit, reverse the opening procedure.
Rev.-01
4-40
4.4.2
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Power Board Assembly
CAUTION
If the power board assembly needs to be removed, remove the power cable and wait for 5
minutes or more before dismount the assembly; this will discharge the residual electrical
charge of the electrolytic capacitor.
Touching the board before the capacitor discharges may cause electric shock.

"4.2.17 Removing Media Guide F (Upper)" p.4-24
2. Remove the connectors.
3. Remove the screws (9 pieces) that retain power board assembly.
2
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the power board assembly

(cup screw M3 6)
4. Remove the power board assembly.

5. Replace the power board assembly.
4-41
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.4.3
Replacing HEATER CONT Board
CAUTION
Before you replace a board assembly, remove the AC inlet cable.

You may suffer electric shock due to standby current.
When you handle a circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare hands.
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements.
When connecting and removing the FFC type cables to/from the MAIN board assembly
connectors, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly.
connectors, causing a breakdown of the on-board elements.

Rev.-01
4-42
4 Parts Replacement
2. Detach the connectors listed below from the HEATER CONT board.
Table 4-2 Connectors to HEATER CONT board
No.
Connector
No.
# of
Pins
Color
Connect to
Remark
J1
Black
Config CN
J2
White
Feeder Motor
J3
White
Feeding Unit Sensor
J4
White
Roll Motor
J5
White
Roll Unit Sensor
J6
40
Black
HEATER RELAY A (J3)
J7
40
Black
J8
White
DC IN [HEATER JUNCTION (J2)]
J9
Gray
Communication [HEATER JUNCTION

(J3)]
LAN
10
J10
Gray
LVS [MAIN (143)]
LAN
11
J11
White
Debug
12
J12
Yellow
SMART CARD
Not in use
13
J13
RSV IN 1
Not in use
14
J14
RSV OUT 1
Not in use
15
J15
RSV OUT 2
Not in use
16
J16
RSV IN 2
Not in use
17
J17
THRM 1
Not in use
18
J18
THRM 2
Not in use
19
J19
White
DC IN -> [MAIN J46]
20
J20
White
AC OUT -> DC5V/24V (CN1)
21
J21
Red
POW-ON -> POW [MAIN (J45)]
22
J22
White
AC-IN -> Terminal Stand
23
J23
White
EXT-AC-OUT -> HEATER RELAY A

(J1)
FFC
Not in use
4-43
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the HEATER CONT board.
2
No.
Part name
HEATER CONT board
Screws that retain the HEATER CONT board.

(cup screw M3 6)
4. Replace the HEATER CONT board.

4.4.4
Replacing HEATER RELAY Board
CAUTION


Rev.-01
4-44
4 Parts Replacement
2. Detach the connectors listed below from the heater relay board.
Table 4-3 Connectors to Heater Relay Board
No.
Connector
No.
# of
Pins
Color
Connect to
J1
White
EX-AC-OUT [HEATER CONT (J23)]
J2
White
Plt_Heat 1
J3
40
Black
HEATER CONT (J6)
J4
White
J5
White
Plt_Heat 2
J6
White
Inlet (Large)
J7
White
Pre_Heat
J8
White
Pre_Heat
J9
White
Aft_Heat
10
J10
Blue
Cooling FAN
11
J11
White
Vacum FAN (#1, #2)
12
J12
White
Platen_Thrm 1
13
J13
Black
Platen_Thrm 2
14
J14
Black
Vacum FAN (#3, #4)
15
J15
Red
Pre_Thrm 1
16
J16
Yellow
Pre_Thrm 2
17
J17
White
Aft_Thrm 1
18
J18
Black
Aft_Thrm 2
19
J19
Red
Reserve 1 Thrm
20
J20
Yellow
Reserve 2 Thrm
Remark
FFC
Not in use
4-45
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (6 pieces) that retain the heater relay board.
2
No.
Part name
Heater relay board
Screws that retain the heater relay board

(cup screw M3 6)
4. Remove the heater relay board.

5. Replace the heater relay board.
4.4.5
Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (for Main Board)
1. Open the board box 64.

"4.4.1 Opening Board Box 64" p.4-40
2. Detach the connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly.
Rev.-01
4-46
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the cooling fan (24V) assembly.
1
Back of the leg holder base
No.
Part name
Cooling fan (24V) assembly
Screws that retain the cooling fan (24V) assembly

30)
Connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly
4. Replace the cooling fan (24V) assembly.

4-47
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.4.6
Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (in Media Guide F)

2. Remove the connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly.
2
No.
Part name
Cooling fan mounting plate
Screws that retain the cooling fan mounting plate

Connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly
4. Remove the cooling fan mounting plate.

1
No.
1
Rev.-01
Part name
4-48
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the cooling fan (24V) assembly

30)
6. Remove the cooling fan (24V) assembly.

4.4.7
Replacing MAIN Board
CAUTION

NOTE
Be sure to back up the parameters before replacing the MAIN board assembly.
"7.3.1 Parameter Backup" p.7-9
4-49
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(1) Replacing SODIMM

2
No.
Part name
SODIMM
Main board assembly
2. Open the lock to both sides.

3. Remove the SODIMM.
4. Replace the SODIMM.
NOTE
Push in the SODIMM following the notches until click sound occurs.
(2) Replacing Main Board Assembly

1. Remove the board box 64.
2. Remove the SODIMM.
"(1) Replacing SODIMM" p.4-50
Rev.-01
4-50
4 Parts Replacement
3. Detach the connectors listed below from the MAIN board assembly.
CAUTION
Pulling or pushing them slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the connectors,
causing a breakdown of the on-board devices.
Table 4-4 Connectors to Main Board Assembly

No.
Connector
No.
# of
Pins
Colors
Connect to
Remark
J1
14
White
P/S (CON301)
FFC
J2
Black
Config_CN
J3
144
Black
SODIMM
J4
Black
CLKDV_JTAG
J5
28
Black
PANEL_UNIT
J6
Silver
LAN
J7
Option_IF
Not in use
J8
Option_IF
Not in use
J9
30
Black
CR Board (J206)
FFC
10
J10
30
Black
CR Board (J202)
FFC
11
J11
30
Black
CR Board (J201)
FFC
12
J12
White
PF_ENC
13
J13
14
J14
Black
Maint.Cover_Sensor
15
J15
Blue
Ink_Sensor_C
16
J16
Red
Ink_Sensor_M
17
J17
Yellow
Ink_Sensor_Y
18
J18
19
J19
20
J20
White
PF_MT
21
J21
White
CR_MT
22
J22
White
PUMP_MT
23
J23
USB
4-51
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-4 Connectors to Main Board Assembly (Continued)

No.
Connector
No.
# of
Pins
Colors
Connect to
24
J24
White
CR_ORG
25
J25
White
Vacum_FAN_1
26
J26
White
Vacum_FAN_1
27
J27
Black
W_ORG
28
J28
Red
Vacum_FAN_3
29
J29
Yellow
Vacum_FAN_4
30
J30
Blue
LEVER_up
31
J31
32
J32
White
COOLING_FAN_1
33
J33
Red
Waste_Fluid_Full_Sensor
34
J34
35
J35
Yellow
Waste_Box_Sensor_L
36
J36
Red
COOLING_FAN_3
37
J37
38
J38
Yellow
F_Cover_R_Sensor
39
J39
40
J40
Blue
F_Cover_L_Sensor
41
J41
Black
Debug CN
42
J42
Black
P_REAR_R
43
J43
Silver
LDVS -> [HEATER CONT (J10)]
44
J44
Black
CPLD
45
J45
46
J46
Rev.-01
Remark
COOLING_FAN_2
LAN
Not in use
4
White
HEATER CONT (J19)
4-52
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the screws (6 pieces) that retain the MAIN board assembly.
2
No.
Part name
Main board assembly
Screws that retain the MAIN board assembly

(cup screw M3 6)
5. Remove the MAIN board assembly.

6. Replace the MAIN board assembly.
8. Install the firmware.
"7.3.5 Firmware Installation" p.7-16
9. Install the parameters backup.
"7.3.1 Parameter Backup" p.7-9
4.4.8
Replacing Fuse
CAUTION
Remove the AC inlet cable to replace the fuse before performing work.
When replacing fuses, install the fuse which conforms to the specifications (250V-15A,
10.31 mm x 38.1 mm).
The double pole/neutral line has a fuse.

4-53
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Replace the blown fuses.

There are two fuses for one power supply (four fuses in total).
CAUTION
Dont touch the cap of a fuse with bare hands.
No.
Part name
Fuse (main side)
Fuse (heater side)
Fuse holder (main side)
Fuse holder (heater side)
TIP
The fuses are called F1, F2, F3, F4 from the left. Each functions as follows.
No.
Rev.-01
Function
F1
MAIN LIVE
F2
MAIN NEUTRAL
F3
HEATER LIVE
F4
HEATER NEUTRAL
4-54
4.4.9
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Inlet Assembly
CAUTION
Remove the AC inlet cable to replace the fuse before replacing the AC inlet.
(1) Replacing AC Inlet Small (Main Side)

2. Remove the connectors (3 pieces).
No.
Part name
AC inlet small
Connector
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the AC inlet small.

1
4-55
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
AC inlet small
Screws that retain the AC inlet small

(countersunk head screw M3 6)
4. Remove the AC inlet small from outside.

5. Replace the AC inlet small.
Rev.-01
4-56
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing AC Inlet Large (Heater Side)

2. Remove the connectors (3 pieces).
No.
Part name
AC inlet large
Connector
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the AC inlet large.

1
No.
Part name
AC inlet large
Screws that retain the AC inlet large

4. Remove the AC inlet large from inside.

5. Replace the AC inlet large.
4-57
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.5 Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section)

This section describes the procedure to replace the boards in the Y rail section.
4.5.1
Replacing Heater Junction Board Assembly
CAUTION

1. Move the carriage to the opposite side of the origin.

"4.8.1 Releasing Head Lock" p.4-105
4. Detach the connector to the heater junction board assembly.
Table 4-5 Connectors to Heater Junction Board Assembly
No.
Connector
No.
# of
Pins
J1
J2
J3
J4
10
J5
Color
Connect to
Remark
Config CN
4
White
DC IN -> HEATER CONT (J8)

Communication -> HEATER CONT (J9)
LAN
White
HEATER CONT (J10)
Option
10
White
INK SLOT1
J6
10
White
INK SLOT2
J7
10
White
INK SLOT3
J8
10
White
INK SLOT4
J9
10
White
Not in use
10
J10
10
White
Not in use
11
J11
White
SubTank1
12
J12
White
SubTank2
13
J13
White
SubTank3
Rev.-01
4-58
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-5 Connectors to Heater Junction Board Assembly (Continued)

No.
Connector
No.
# of
Pins
Color
Connect to
Remark
14
J14
White
SubTank4
15
J15
White
Not in use
16
J16
White
Not in use
17
J17
EX ACT1
Not in use
18
J18
EX SLOT1
Not in use
19
J19
EX ACT2
Not in use
20
J20
EX SLOT2
Not in use
21
J21
EX ACT3
Not in use
22
J22
EX ACT4
Not in use
23
J23
EX SLOT3
Not in use
24
J24
EX SLOT4
Not in use
25
J25
EX DC OUT
Not in use
5. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the heater junction board assembly.
Rear view
Enlarged view
No.
Part name
Heater junction board assembly
Screws that retain the heater junction board assembly

(cup screw M3 6)
Y rail assembly
NOTE
Use a ratchet to remove the screws that retain the heater junction board assembly.
4-59
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
6. Replace the heater junction board assembly.

4.6 Replacing X Rail Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the X rail section.
4.6.1
Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt
CAUTION
Do not touch the motor right after starting-up the plotter. Otherwise, you may be burned.
1. Open the maintenance cover L.

4. Loosen the screws (2 pieces) that retain the PF motor.
4
No.
Part name
PF motor
Screws that retain the PF motor

PF speed reduction belt
PF drive mounting plate
5. Confirm that the PF speed reduction belt has been loosened.
Rev.-01
4-60
4 Parts Replacement
6. Detach the PF speed reduction belt.
NOTE
When installing the PF motor assembly, ensure that the PF speed reduction belt is evenly guided
along the center part of the PF motor assembly pulley by moving the speed reduction pulley by hand.
7. Replace the PF speed reduction belt.

8. Retain the PF motor by pushing the motor backward.
9. Confirm that the PF speed reduction belt is not loosened.
4.6.2
Replacing PF Motor Assembly
CAUTION
1. Initialize the PF motor counter.

"5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu" p.5-52
5. Detach the PF speed reduction belt.
"4.6.1 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt" p.4-60
4-61
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
6. Detach the PF motor cable from the motor connector.

1
No.
Part name
PF motor
PF motor connector
PF motor cable assembly
7. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the PF motor.

4
No.
Part name
PF motor
Screws that retain the PF motor

PF speed reduction belt
PF drive mounting plate
8. Remove the PF motor.

9. Replace the PF motor.
10. Lightly tighten the screws (2 pieces) that retain the PF motor.
Rev.-01
4-62
4 Parts Replacement
11. Install the PF speed reduction belt.
NOTE
When installing the PF motor assembly, ensure that the PF speed reduction belt is evenly guided
along the center part of the PF motor assembly pulley by moving the speed reduction pulley by hand.
12. Retain the PF motor by pushing the PF motor backward.

13. Confirm that the PF speed reduction belt is not loosened.
4.6.3
Replacing PF Encoder Assembly

2. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the PF encoder assembly.
2
No.
Part name
PF encoder
Screws that retain the PF encoder
ENC scale holder
PF-ENC scale
3. Remove the PF encoder assembly.

4. Replace the PF encoder assembly.
NOTE
When reassembling the PF_ENC assembly and the PF encoder bracket, make sure the embossed
notch is in the correct position.
4-63
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
5. Adjust the PF_ENC scale.

"7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment" p.7-29
4.6.4
Replacing PF_ENC Scale, PF Speed Reduction Pulley
NOTE
While replacing the PF scale assembly, make sure to avoid deforming the PF scale. If it is deformed,
image quality may be affected.

2. Loosen the PF speed reduction belt.
"4.6.1 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt" p.4-60
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF connection axis.
4. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF_ENC scale.
4
No.
Part name
PF_ENC scale
ENC scale holder
PF speed reduction pulley
Screws that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF

connection axis
Screws that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF_ENC

scale
(P tight cup screw M3 8)
5. Remove the ENC scale holder.
Rev.-01
4-64
4 Parts Replacement
6. Remove the PF_ENC scale.

7. Remove the PF speed reduction belt.
8. Remove the PF speed reduction pulley.
9. Replace the PF speed reduction pulley.
10. Replace the PF_ENC scale.
11. Adjust the PF_ENC scale.
"7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment" p.7-29
4.6.5
Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly

TIP
The P_REAR sensor assembly is located near the center of the X rail (joint part of the grid roller).

"4.2.19 Removing Media Guide R (Lower)" p.4-29
3. Detach the connector (MAIN J42) to the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.
TIP
The P_REAR sensor assembly cable is a stranded wire of red, black, blue, and orange.
4-65
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.
1
Rear view
No.
Part name
P_REAR_R sensor assembly
Screws that retain the P_REAR_R sensor assembly

(cup screw M2 5)
R sensor bracket
5. Remove the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.

6. Replace the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.
Rev.-01
4-66
Enlarged view
4.6.6
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Lever Up Sensor
1. Open the maintenance cover.

3. Remove the lever up sensor cable assembly.
4. Remove the lever up sensor assembly.
Rear view
Enlarged view
No.
Part name
Lever up sensor cable assembly
Lever up sensor assembly
Cover stay RR
5. Replace the lever up sensor assembly.
4-67
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
6. Apply adhesive material.
No.
Part name
Lever up sensor assembly
Adhesive material application surface
4.6.7
Replacing Heater, Thermistor
NOTE
Set the heater to the original position without bending. The surface temperature of the platen changes
and printing quality becomes poor if the heater assembly position is set insufficiently.
(1) Replacing the Pre-heater, Pre-thermistor

NOTE
Set the heater to the original position without bending. The surface temperature of the platen changes
and printing quality becomes poor if the heater assembly position is set insufficiently.
Rev.-01
4-68
4 Parts Replacement
The pre-heater is arranged as follows.

2
No.
Part name
Pre-heater 1
Pre-heater 2
1. Lift up the media guide R (upper).

"4.2.18 Removing Media Guide R (Upper)" p.4-27
2. Detach the connectors (2 pieces) to the pre-heater and the connectors (2 pieces) to the pre-thermistor.
2
No.
Part name
Connectors to the pre-heater thermistor
Connectors to the pre-heater
4-69
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the pre-heater heat insulator from the part where the heater or the thermistor is broken.
TIP
The pre-heater heat insulator and the pre-heater are affixed using double-faced tape.
4. Mark the location of the broken pre-heater.
NOTE
Affix the pre-heater at the correct position. If not, the temperature of the media guide R cannot be
appropriate and image quality may be affected.
5. Remove the broken pre-heater.

3
Rear view of media guide R
No.
Part name
Pre-heater
Pre-heater heat insulator
6. Replace the pre-heater.

7. Remove the thermistor film.
Rev.-01
4-70
4 Parts Replacement
8. Remove the pre-thermistor.
TIP
The pre-thermistor is affixed using thermistor film.
.
Rear view of media guide R (Upper)
No.
Part name
Pre-thermistor
Pre-heater heat insulator
Thermistor film
9. Remove the pre-thermistor.

10. Replace the pre-thermistor.
4-71
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing Platen Heater, Platen Thermistor

The platen heater is arranged as follows.
2
No.
Part name
Platen heater 1
Platen heater 2
1. Open the front cover.

2. Remove the screws (16 pieces) that retain the platen.
2
No.
Part name
Platen
Screws that retain the platen
3. Lift up the platen.
Rev.-01
4-72
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the connectors (2 pieces) to the platen heater and the connectors (2 pieces) to the platen
thermistor.
1
Rear view of platen
4
3
No.
Part name
Heat insulator platen
Connectors to the platen heater
Connectors to the platen thermistor
Heat insulator thermistor
5. Remove the heat insulator heater or the heat insulator thermistor from the part where the heater or the
thermistor is broken.
TIP
The heat insulator platen, the heat insulator thermistor and the platen heater are affixed using
double-faced tape.
6. Mark the location of the broken platen heater.
NOTE
Affix the platen heater at the correct position. If not, the temperature of the platen cannot be
appropriate and image quality may be affected.
7. Remove the broken platen heater.

8. Replace the platen heater.
9. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the platen thermistor holder.
10. Detach the platen thermistor holder.
11. Replace the platen thermistor.
4-73
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(3) Replacing After-Heater, After-Thermistor

The after-heater is arranged as follows.
2
No.
Part name
After-heater 1
After-heater 2
1. Lift up the media guide F (upper).

2. Detach the connectors (2 pieces) to the after-heater and the connectors (2 pieces) to the after-thermistor
inside the media guide F (upper).
3
Rear view of media guide F
No.
Part name
After-heater heat insulator
Connectors to the after-thermistor
Connectors to the after-heater
Rev.-01
4-74
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the after-heater heat insulator from the part where the heater or the thermistor is broken.
TIP
The after-heater heat insulator and the after-heater are affixed using double-faced tape.
5. Mark the part where the after-heater is broken.
NOTE
Affix the after-heater at the correct position. If not, the temperature of the media guide F (upper)
cannot be appropriate and image quality may be affected.
6. Remove the broken after-heater.

1
No.
Part name
After-heater
7. Replace the after-heater.
4-75
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
8. Remove the after-thermistor.

No.
Part name
After-heater thermistor
9. Remove the after-thermistor.

10. Replace the after-thermistor.
4.6.8
Replacing Suction Fan
The suction fan is arranged as follows.

4
3
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Suction fan 1
Suction fan 2
Suction fan 3
Suction fan 4
4-76
4 Parts Replacement
1. Remove the platen.

"(2) Replacing Platen Heater, Platen Thermistor" p.4-72
2. Remove the connector to the suction fan.
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the suction fan.
1
No.
Part name
Suction fan
Screws that retain the suction fan

Connector to the suction fan
4. Remove the suction fan.

5. Replace the suction fan.
4-77
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.6.9
Replacing Platen Non-Reflective Tape

2. Strip the platen non-reflective tape.
1
No.
Part name
Platen
Platen non-reflective tape
NOTE
Once the platen non-reflective tape is stripped, it must not be reused.
3. Replace the platen non-reflective tape.
4.6.10 Replacing Media Holder

Rev.-01
4-78
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the media holder stopper.
2
No.
Part name
Media holder stopper
Screws that retain the media holder stopper

4. Remove the media holder stopper.

5. Pull out the media holder from the left side (the opposite side of the origin).
1
No.
Part name
Media holder
Platen
6. Replace the media holder.

4-79
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.6.11 Replacing Flushing Tray

The flushing tray is arranged as follows.
2
No.
Part name
Flushing tray R
Flushing tray L
CAUTION
When replacing the flushing tray, wear rubber gloves
(1) Replacing Flushing Tray R

Rev.-01
4-80
4 Parts Replacement
3. Lift up the flushing frame hook.

1
No.
Part name
Flushing tray
Flushing frame
Flushing frame hook
4. Remove the flushing frame.

5. Detach the flushing tray by pushing the flushing tray from behind the flushing frame.
2
No.
Part name
Flushing tray
Flushing frame
6. Replace the flushing tray.

4-81
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing Flushing Tray L

2. Lift up the flushing frame hook.
1
No.
Part name
Flushing tray
Flushing frame
Flushing frame hook

4. Detach the flushing tray by pushing the flushing tray from behind the flushing frame.
5. Replace the flushing tray.
4.6.12 Replacing Flushing Absorber

CAUTION
When replacing the flushing absorber, wear rubber gloves.

"4.6.11 Replacing Flushing Tray" p.4-80
Rev.-01
4-82
4 Parts Replacement
2. Replace the flushing absorbers (3 pieces).

1
No.
1
Part name
Flushing absorbers
TIP
The flushing absorbers are three thicknesses.
4-83
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.7 Replacing Y Rail Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the Y rail section.
4.7.1
Replacing Steel Belt
CAUTION
When replacing the steel belt, be careful not to cut your hand with the steel belt.
Steel belt replacement must be done by 2 or more persons.
NOTE
Pay close attention in handling the steel belt. Bending or dust on the steel belt may cause steel belt
breakage.

6. Move the carriage to the left side (opposite side of the origin).
Rev.-01
4-84
4 Parts Replacement
7. Loosen the steel belt adjustment screws (2 pieces).

1
No.
Part name
CR driven pulley
Steel belt adjustment screws

40)
Steel belt
Return pulley mounting plate
Screw cap
8. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the belt.

3
Left view
Right view
No.
Part name
Head cover
Steel belt
Screws that retain the belt
9. Pull off the steel belt.

10. Remove the CR driven pulley assembly.
4-85
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
11. Insert the measure through the hole of the Y drive base to the inside of Y rail.
12. Pull out the measure from the hole of the return pulley mounting plate.
View of origin side
View of opposite side to origin
No.
Part name
Measure
Y drive base
13. Affix the steel belt to the tip of the measure using tape.
3
No.
Part name
Measure
Steel belt
Tape
14. Wind up the measure with the steel belt affixed to it.
15. Detach the steel belt from the measure after the tip of the measure comes out from the hole of the Y drive
base.
16. Affix one side of the steel belt to the right side of the carriage.
Rev.-01
4-86
4 Parts Replacement
17. Install the CR driven pulley assembly.

18. Affix the other side of the steel belt to the left side of the carriage.
19. Adjust the steel belt tension.
"7.4 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment" p.7-26
4.7.2
Replacing CR Motor Assembly
CAUTION
Do not touch the motor after continuous operation. You may get burned by the motor heated
up.

3. Remove the CR motor cable assembly.
TIP
Connect the white cable of the CR motor cable assembly to the side of the CR motor assembly where
the red seal is affixed.
The polarity of the CR motor assembly and CR motor cable assembly is as follows.
Red seal: +
White cable: +
Black cable: -
4-87
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Loosen the hexagon socket screws (4 pieces) that retain the CR motor assembly.
1
No.
Part name
CR motor assembly
CR motor spacer
Hexagon socket screws (M4 6)
CR motor cable assembly
5. Confirm that the CR speed reduction belt is loosened.

3
No.
Part name
CR motor assembly
CR speed reduction belt
Y drive base
CR drive pulley
6. Remove the CR speed reduction belt.

7. Remove the hexagon socket screws (4 pieces) that retain the CR motor assembly.
8. Remove the CR motor assembly.
Rev.-01
4-88
4 Parts Replacement
9. Replace the CR motor assembly.
NOTE
When installing the CR motor assembly, ensure that the steel belt is evenly guided along the center
part of the CR motor assembly pulley by moving the carriage by hand.
10. Adjust the CR speed reduction belt tension.

"7.6 CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment" p.7-31
4.7.3
Replacing CR Drive Pulley Assembly

3. Loosen the hexagon socket screws (4 pieces) that retain the CR motor assembly to loosen the CR speed
reduction belt.
1
No.
Part name
CR motor assembly
Hexagon socket screws (M4 6)
CR motor cable assembly
4-89
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Confirm that the CR speed reduction belt is loosened.

3
No.
Part name
CR motor assembly
Y drive base
CR drive pulley
5. Loosen the steel belt adjustment screws (2 pieces).

1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
CR driven pulley
Steel belt adjustment screws

40)
Steel belt
Screw cap
4-90
4 Parts Replacement
6. Remove the CR drive pulley.

7. Remove the CR speed reduction belt.
8. Replace the CR drive pulley assembly.
NOTE
The parts accompanied when removing the CR drive pulley are collectively called CR drive pulley
assembly.
When replacing the CR speed reduction belt, reuse the CR drive pulley assembly that is currently
used.

10. Adjust the CR speed reduction belt tension.
"7.6 CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment" p.7-31
4.7.4
Replacing T Fence

6. Move the carriage to the left side (opposite side of the origin)
7. Detach the T fence spring from the T fence spring hook in the left side of the Y rail (opposite side of the
origin).
4-91
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
8. Detach the T fence from the T fence spring.

1
No.
Part name
T fence spring
T fence spring hook
T fence
9. Detach the T fence from the T fence guide plate (3 pieces).

1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
T fence guide plate
T fence
4-92
4 Parts Replacement
10. Detach the T fence from the hook of the T fence clamping plate.
1
No.
Part name
T fence clamping plate
T fence
11. Replace the T fence.
NOTE
When assembling the T fence, make sure to follow the instructions below.
If the T fence is coated with protective film, remove the film and attach the T fence correctly.
Correctly attach the T fence to the hook on the T fence bracket referring to the figure for step 8.
Allow a margin between the T fence and the hook of the clamping plate.
When retaining the clamping plate with screws, allow a margin so that the T fence can slightly
move.
Referring to the following figures, insert the T fence in the T fence guide plate and CR_ENC
assembly.
4-93
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
T fence guide plate
T fence
CR_ENC assembly
Carriage
4.7.5
Replacing CR Origin Sensor

3. Move the carriage to the left side (opposite side of the origin)
4. Remove the CR_ORG cable assembly.
Rev.-01
4-94
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the CR origin sensor.

3
No.
Part name
CR origin sensor
CR_ORG cable assembly
Y rail
6. Replace the CR origin sensor.

No.
1
Part name
Adhesive material application surface
4-95
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.7.6
Replacing CR Driven Pulley
NOTE
After installing the CR driven pulley, always ensure that the steel belt is evenly guided along the
center part of the CR motor assembly pulley by moving the carriage left and right by hand.

3. Remove the steel belt adjustment screws (2 pieces).
1
No.
Part name
CR driven pulley
Adjustment screws
40)
Steel belt
Screw cap
4. Confirm that the steel belt is loosened.

5. Remove the CR driven pulley.
6. Remove the screw caps (2 pieces).
7. Replace the CR driven pulley assembly.
Rev.-01
4-96
4 Parts Replacement
NOTE
Seven parts are accompanied when removing the CR drive pulley. They are collectively called CR
driven pulley assembly except for the screw caps.

4.7.7
Replacing Steel Bearer

3. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the steel bearer.
2
No.
Part name
Steel bearer
Screws that retain the steel bearer

4-97
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the film FFC retainers (6 pieces).

1
No.
Part name
Steel bearer
Film FFC retainer
5. Remove the screws (3 pieces each) that retain the cable guides (2 pieces).
2
No.
Part name
Cable guide
Screws that retain the cable guide

18)
6. Remove the cable guide.

7. Remove the steel bearer.
8. Replace the steel bearer.
Rev.-01
4-98
4.7.8
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing CR_FFC
CAUTION
When replacing the board or connecting and removing FFC, first remove the power plug
and leave it for a while. Overcurrent may occur and damage the board.
When connecting and removing the FFC type cables to/from the CR board assembly
connectors, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.
1. Remove the CR cover.

"4.8.2 Removing CR Board Cover" p.4-106
2. Remove the steel bearer.
"4.7.7 Replacing Steel Bearer" p.4-97
3. Remove the board box cover 64.
4. Detach CR-FFC (3 pieces) from the CR board assembly (J201 - J203).
5. Detach CR-FFC (3 pieces) from the MAIN board assembly (J9 - J11).
6. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the FFC guide (1 piece).
7. Remove the FFC guide.
8. Remove the FT guide material (2 pieces).
2
No.
Part name
FFC guide
Screws that retain the FFC guide

FT guide material
4-99
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
9. Pull out the CR_FFC from the hole on the origin side of the cable guide.
10. Pull out the CR_FFC from the hole on the leg holder base (64).
2
Cable guide
No.
Part name
Back of leg holder base 64
the
CR_FFC
Cable guide
Leg holder base (64)
11. Replace the CR_FFC.
TIP
Fold the CR_FFC as follows.
A: valley fold
Face the printed
side front side
335 mm
60 mm
MAIN board 330 mm
side
CR board side
Fix the ferritic core with cable holder
12. Connect the CR_FFC (3 pieces) to the CR board assembly (J201 - J203).
13. Draw the CR_FFC through the same path as above.
14. Connect the CR_FFC to the MAIN board assembly (J9 - J11).
Rev.-01
4-100
4.7.9
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Pressure Roller

2. Lift up one end of the pressure arm slightly with a finger and hold it.
3. Pull down the other end of the pressure roller.
No.
Part name
Pressure roller
Pressure arm
4. Confirm that one end of the pressure roller is detached.

5. Pull down the other end of the pressure roller.
6. Remove the pressure roller.
7. Replace the pressure roller.
4-101
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.7.10 Replacing Ink Tube

1. Perform ink discharge operation to discharge ink entirely from the ink paths.
"5.7.8 HeadWash Menu" p.5-43
3. Remove the cartridge cable cover plate.
"4.10.1 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly" p.4-129
4. Remove the screws (4 pieces each) that retain the tube guide plate.
2
No.
Part name
Cable guide plate
Screws that retain the cable guide plate

(P tight cup screws M3 8)
5. Remove the tube guide plates (2 pieces).

6. Remove the FFC guides (6 pieces).
Rev.-01
4-102
4 Parts Replacement
7. Remove the tube clamps (6 pieces).

2
No.
Part name
Ink tube
Film FFC guide
Tube clamp
8. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the tube guide plate.
Upper view
Lower view
No.
Part name
Tube guide plate
Screws that retain the tube guide plate

Ink tube
9. Remove the tube guide plate.

10. Detach the ink tube from the three-way joint.
4-103
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
11. Pull out the ink tube from inside the carriage.
2
No.
Part name
Three-way joint
Ink tube
12. Loosen the joint screw on the tip of the sub tank.
13. Detach the ink tube from the joint tube.
3
No.
Part name
Ink tube
Joint tube
Joint screw
14. Remove the ink tube.

15. Replace the ink tube.
17. Charge ink.
"5.6 Ink Charging Menu" p.5-22
Rev.-01
4-104
4 Parts Replacement
4.8 Replacing Cursor Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the cursor section.
4.8.1
Releasing Head Lock
When head lock is released on the software, the carriage moves to the origin position after the power is turned
off. This section describes the procedure to release head lock with the power turned off.
2. Push down the cap on the left side of carriage.
1
No.
1
Part name
Cap
3. Move the carriage to the opposite side to the origin while holding down the cap.
NOTE
For enabling head lock again, the cap does not need to be pushed down. Move back the carriage to
the position where the carriage is fixed with a sound.
4-105
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.2
Removing CR Board Cover

2. Remove the screws (3 pieces) that retain the CR board cover.
1
No.
Part name
CR board cover
Screws that retain the CR board cover

3. Remove the CR board cover.
4.8.3
Replacing CR Board Assembly
CAUTION
When replacing the board or connecting and removing FFC, first remove the power plug
and leave it for a while. Overcurrent may occur and damage the board.
When connecting and removing the FFC type cables to/from the CR board assembly
connectors, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.

2. Remove the head FFC (2 pieces).
Rev.-01
4-106
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the CR_FFC (3 pieces).

3
No.
Part name
CR board assembly
Head FFC
CR_FFC
Connector
Screws that retain the CR board assembly 1

(cup screw M3 6)
Hexagon spacer
4. Detach the connectors to the CR board assembly listed below.

Table 4-6 Connectors to CR board assembly
No.
Connector
No.
# of
Pins
Color
Connect to
Remark
J201
30
Black
MAIN (J11)
FFC
J202
30
Black
MAIN (J10)
FFC
J203
30
Black
MAIN (J9)
FFC
J204
30
Black
HEAD (J1)
FFC
J205
30
Black
HEAD (J2)
FFC
J206
White
CUTTER_SOL
J207
White
CR_ENC
J208
Black
P_EDGE
J209
White
PG_ORIGIN
10
J210
Black
HEAD_FAN_1
11
J211
Red
HEAD_FAN_2
4-107
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the CR board assembly and the hexagon spacer (2 pieces).
6. Remove the CR board assembly.
7. Replace the CR board assembly.
4.8.4
Replacing CR Encoder Assembly
NOTE
When removing the CR_ENC assembly, pay attention to avoid nicking the T fence.

3. Open the rear side cover.
4. Detach the connector to the CR encoder assembly.
5. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the CR encoder assembly.
1
Rear view of carriage
Section view
No.
Part name
CR encoder assembly
Screws that retain the CR encoder assembly

Y rail assembly
CR board mounting base
T fence
6. Remove the CR encoder assembly.

7. Replace the CR encoder assembly.
Rev.-01
4-108
4.8.5
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing PG Origin Sensor Assembly

2. Open the side top cover R.
3. Remove the PG origin sensor relay assembly.
4. Remove the PG origin sensor assembly.
1
No.
Part name
PG origin sensor relay assembly
PG origin sensor assembly
5. Replace the PG origin sensor assembly.

4-109
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.6
Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly
1. Remove the head cover.

"4.8.6 Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly" p.4-110
2. Lift up the cursor roller arm assembly to the direction shown below, and lift up the cursor arm spring.
CAUTION
Note that the tension of the cursor arm spring is high.
3. Confirm that the bearing is detached from the cursor guide.

4. Pull off the cursor roller arm to the direction shown below with the cursor arm spring being lifted up.
2
Right view
Left view
No.
Part name
Cursor roller arm
Cursor arm spring
5. Replace the cursor roller arm assembly.
NOTE
Five parts are accompanied when removing the cursor roller arm. They are collectively called cursor
roller arm assembly except for the cursor arm spring.
4.8.7
Removing Print Head Cover

Rev.-01
4-110
4 Parts Replacement
3. Detach the connectors (2 pieces) to the head fan assembly from the head fan relay assembly.
2
No.
Part name
Connector to the head fan assembly
Head fan relay assembly
CR board cover
4. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the print head cover.
Left view
Right view
2 2
No.
Part name
Print head cover
Screws that retain the print head cover

5. Remove the print head cover.
4-111
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.8
Replacing Damper Assembly L_Assy
CAUTION
2. Remove the print head cover.
"4.8.7 Removing Print Head Cover" p.4-110
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the damper guide plate.
1
No.
Part name
Damper guide plate
Screws that retain the damper guide plate

Ink tube
4. Remove the damper guide plate.

5. Remove the joint screws (2 pieces) of the related color.
6. Remove the head tubes (2 pieces) of the related color.
7. Remove the damper assembly L (2 pieces) of the related color.
8. Replace the damper assembly L.
Rev.-01
4-112
4 Parts Replacement
CAUTION
Dont touch the transparent film on the side of the damper assembly L. Ink charged in the
damper assembly L will discharge.
Take care not to damage the transparent film on the side of the damper assembly L.
Place cotton waste under the detached damper to prevent residual ink discharging.
No.
Part name
Damper assembly L
Joint screw M7
VJ tube 3-4
9. Replace the damper assembly L_assembly.
NOTE
The damper assembly L and the O ring are combined so that it is collectively called damper assembly
L_assembly.

11. Charge ink.
4-113
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.9
Replacing Print Head
CAUTION
While operation, pay special attention not to touch the head nozzles or contaminate them
with foreign objects.
The print head assembly has been adjusted. Do not disassemble it.

3. Remove the damper L_assembly.
"4.8.8 Replacing Damper Assembly L_Assy" p.4-112
4. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the print head guide.
1
No.
Part name
Print head guide
Screws that retain the print head guide

5. Remove the print head guide.
Rev.-01
4-114
4 Parts Replacement
6. Remove the print head.

1
No.
1
Part name
Print head
7. Remove the head FFC (2 pieces) from the print head.

2
Front
No.
Back
Part name
Head FFC
Print head
8. Replace the print head.

4-115
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.10 Replacing Head FFC

CAUTION
While operation, pay special attention not to touch the head nozzles or contaminate them
with foreign objects.
The print head assembly has been adjusted. Do not disassemble it.
2. Initialize the head counter.
"5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu" p.5-44
4. Remove the damper assembly L.
"4.8.8 Replacing Damper Assembly L_Assy" p.4-112
5. Remove the damper fixing material.
6. Remove the print head.
"4.8.9 Replacing Print Head" p.4-114
No.
Part name
CR board assembly
Head FFC
7. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the flat core holder.
Rev.-01
4-116
4 Parts Replacement
8. Remove the flat core holder (2 pieces).

9. Remove the flat core (2 pieces).
2
1
.
No.
Part name
Flat core holder
Screws that retain the flat core holder

Flat core
Head FFC
10. Replace the head FFCs (2 pieces).
NOTE
Fold the head FFC as follows.
A: mountain fold
B: valley fold
CR board side
Face the printed
side front side
10 mm
90 mm
Print head side
10 mm
Turn the second one inside out to fold the same way.
Contact the non-engraved surfaces of the head FFC with each other so that the engraved surfaces
face outwardly.
4-117
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.11 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly

2. Detach the connector to the P_EDGE sensor assembly from the CR board assembly (J208).
"4.8.3 Replacing CR Board Assembly" p.4-106
3. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the P_EDGE sensor assembly.
1
No.
Part name
P_EDGE sensor assembly
Screw that retains the P_EDGE sensor assembly

4. Detach the cable of the P_EDGE sensor assembly from the clamp (4 pieces).
2
Left lower view
No.
Part name
Cable of the P_EDGE sensor assembly
Clamp
5. Replace the P_EDGE sensor assembly.
Rev.-01
4-118
Upper view
4 Parts Replacement
TIP
The cable of the P_EDGE sensor assembly is a stranded wire of red, black, blue and orange.
4-119
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.9 Replacing Maintenance Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance section.
4.9.1
Removing Maintenance Inner Cover

"4.2.3 Removing Maintenance Cover U" p.4-10
3. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the maintenance inside cover.
1
Upper view
Front view
No.
Part name
Maintenance inside cover
Screws that retain the maintenance inside cover

4. Remove the maintenance inside cover.
Rev.-01
4-120
4.9.2
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Cleaner Head

2. Using tweezers, detach the cleaner head from the hook at the cleaner head retaining section, and remove
it upwardly.
1
No.
1
Part name
Cleaner head
3. Replace the cleaner head.
NOTE
When reassembling the cleaner head, pay attention to the following:
Do not touch the cleaner head with bare hands.
Make sure that the cleaner head gets no dust or oil.
Install the cleaner head so that the point of the cleaner head is located to the observer's right side.
2
1
No.
Part name
Cleaner head
Head point
Insert the cleaner head into the holder to the full depth securely and hook it.
4-121
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.9.3
Replacing Maintenance Assembly
NOTE
There are some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from the tube outlet
onto the plotter or the covers.
2. Remove the cleaner head.
"4.9.2 Replacing Cleaner Head" p.4-121
3. Remove the maintenance inner cover.
"4.9.1 Removing Maintenance Inner Cover" p.4-120
4. Detach the connector to the wiper origin sensor relay assembly from the MAIN board assembly (J27).
"4.4.7 Replacing MAIN Board" p.4-49
5. Detach the connector to the pump motor relay assembly.
1
No.
1
Part name
Connector to the wiper origin relay cable
6. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the flushing box holder.
7. Remove the flushing box holder.
8. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the head lock holder.
Rev.-01
4-122
4 Parts Replacement
9. Remove the head lock holder.

3
No.
Part name
Flushing box holder
Screw that retains the flushing box holder

Head lock holder
Screw that retains the head lock holder

10. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the waste fluid guide cover.
11. Remove the waste fluid guide cover.
12. Pull off the waste fluid tube.
13. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the waste fluid guide.
14. Replace the waste fluid guide.
2
No.
1
Part name
Waste fluid guide cover
4-123
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
Screw that retains the waste fluid guide cover

(tapping screw M3 6)
Waste fluid guide
Screw that retains the waste fluid guide

Waste fluid tube
15. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the maintenance holder.
16. Remove the screws (6 pieces) that retain the maintenance base.
4
No.
Part name
Maintenance base
Pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 6
Tapping screw M3 6
Pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M4 8
17. Remove the maintenance base.

18. Replace the maintenance assembly from the maintenance base.
Rev.-01
4-124
4 Parts Replacement
19. Prepare the replacement maintenance assembly.

There is 75 mm from the tube clamp area to the tube tip.
Extend the tube to use.
1
2
No.
Part name
Tube clamp
Tube
Maintenance assembly
20. Prepare a tube of 135-140 mm.
No.
1
Part name
Tube
4-125
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
21. Attach the fitting on one side of the tube.
No.
Part name
Tube
Tube fitting
22. Connect the tube coming from the maintenance assembly, and the tube with the fitting.
1

No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Tube
Maintenance assembly tube
4-126
4 Parts Replacement
23. Make sure that the distance from the tube clamp area to the tube tip is between 215 and 220 mm.
1

OOOO
No.
Part name
Tube
Maintenance assembly tube
24. Split the double tube 45mm from the tip of the tube.
OO
No.
1
Part name
Tube
25. Attach the maintenance assembly to the maintenance base.
4-127
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
26. Insert the tip of the tube to the waste fluid guide.
No.
Part name
Tube
Waste fluid guide
27. Push in the tube until the tube tip extends a few millimeters out from the bottom of the waste fluid guide.
2
1
No.
Part name
Waste fluid guide
Tube tip
28. Attach the maintenance base to its original position.

To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
Rev.-01
4-128
4 Parts Replacement
4.10 Replacing IH Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the IH section.
4.10.1 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly

"4.2.10 Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle)" p.4-18
3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the cartridge cable cover plate.
1
Left view
Right view
No.
Part name
Cartridge cable cover plate
Screws that retain the cartridge cable cover plate

4. Remove the cartridge cable cover plate.

5. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the I/C slide (2).
6. Remove the I/C slide (2).
7. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the cartridge side plate.
4-129
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
8. Remove the cartridge side plate.

1
No.
Part name
I/C slide (2)
Screws that retain the I/C slide (2)

Cartridge side plate
Screws that retain the cartridge side plate

9. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the holder pressure spring (4 pieces).
1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Holder pressure spring
Screws that retain the holder pressure spring

4-130
4 Parts Replacement
10. Remove the holder pressure spring.
TIP
There are two holder pressure springs respectively in the upper and lower portion.
11. Detach the cable of the ink ID board assembly from the clamp.
12. Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the ink ID board assembly.
13. Remove the ink ID board assembly.
1
No.
Part name
Ink ID board assembly
Ink cartridge control cable
Clamp
14. Replace the ink ID board assembly.
NOTE
The card board holder is accompanied when removing the ink ID board assembly. They are
collectively called ink ID board assembly.
4-131
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.10.2 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle

3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the I/C slide (2).
5. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the cartridge side plate.
1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
I/C slide (2)
Screws that retain the I/C slide (2)

Screws that retain the cartridge side plate

4-132
4 Parts Replacement
7. Remove the joint screw M6.

1
No.
Part name
Frame assembly, needle
Joint screw M6
Ink tube
NOTE
An O ring is inside the joint screw. Be careful not to lose the O ring.
Soak the O ring in the specified cleaning fluid before installing.
4-133
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
8. Detach the hook of the cartridge slide.
No.
Part name
Cartridge slide
Hook
9. Move the hook of the cartridge slide to the direction shown below.
10. Remove the cartridge slide.
2
No.
Part name
Cartridge slide
Hook of the cartridge slide
11. Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the clamp.
12. Move the frame assembly and the needle to the direction shown below.
Rev.-01
4-134
4 Parts Replacement
13. Remove the frame assembly and the needle.

1
No.
Part name
Hook of the frame assembly and the needle
Clamp
14. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the ink cartridge control cable to the frame assembly and the
needle.
3
No.
Part name
Screw that retains the ink cartridge control cable

(B tight band screw M2 8)
15. Remove the ink cartridge control cable.

4-135
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.10.3 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable

TIP
There are three connectors to the ink cartridge control cable.
1. Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the ink ID board assembly.
"4.10.1 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly" p.4-129
2. Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the frame assembly and the needle.
"4.10.2 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle" p.4-132
3. Remove the screw (1 piece) that retains the ink cartridge control cable to the cartridge side plate.
4
No.
Part name
Screw that retains the ink cartridge control cable

4. Remove the connector to the ink cartridge control cable from the HEATER JUNCTION board assembly
(J5 - J10).
5. Replace the ink cartridge control cable.
4.10.4 Replacing Cartridge Holder Assembly

2. Remove the cartridge cover (middle)
Rev.-01
4-136
4 Parts Replacement

5. Remove the joint screw M6.
"4.10.2 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle" p.4-132
6. Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the clamp.
"4.10.3 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable" p.4-136
7. Replace the cartridge holder assembly.
NOTE
The cartridge holder assembly is composed of many parts. Refer to exploded view for details.
4.10.5 Replacing Two-Way Valve

"4.2.11 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower)" p.4-19
3. Remove the screws (8 pieces) that retain the two-way valve.
1
No.
Part name
Two-way valve mounting plate
Screws that retain the two-way valve

4-137
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the two-way valve mounting plate.
2
Right view
Left view
No.
Part name
Two-way valve mounting plate
Screws that retain the two-way valve

5. Remove the two-way valve mounting plate.

6. Detach the ink tube (2 pieces) from the two-way valve.
7. Remove the two-way valve.
2
Rear view (when replacing cyan)
No.
Part name
Two-way valve
Ink tube
8. Replace the two-way valve.

Rev.-01
4-138
4 Parts Replacement
4.10.6 Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly

"4.2.11 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower)" p.4-19
2. Remove the screws (4 pieces) that retain the absorber mounting plate.
2
No.
Part name
Absorber mounting plate
Screws that retain the absorber mounting plate

Screws that retain the absorber mounting plate

3. Pull out the absorber mounting plate.

4. Replace the sub-tank lower absorber assembly.
NOTE
The sub-tank lower absorber is accompanied when removing the absorber mounting plate. They are
collectively called sub-tank lower absorber assembly.
4.10.7 Replacing Sub-Tank Assembly

2. Remove the two-way valve fixture plate.
"4.10.5 Replacing Two-Way Valve" p.4-137
3. Remove the absorber mounting plate.
"4.10.6 Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly" p.4-139
4-139
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement

5. Remove the intake tubes (2 pieces) from the joint screws (2 pieces).
1
Rear view
Front view
No.
Part name
Joint screw
Ink tube
Sub tank assembly
Two-way valve
6. Remove the screws (2 pieces) that retain the sub tank assembly of the target color to the sub tank pack
base.
1
No.
Part name
Sub tank assembly
Sub tank pack base
Screws that retain the sub tank assembly

(pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3x6)
7. Pull out the sub tank assembly.
Rev.-01
4-140
4 Parts Replacement
8. Replace the sub tank assembly.

10. Charge ink.
4-141
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.11 Replacing Leg Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the leg section.
4.11.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Bottle

NOTE
Discharge waste fluid fully to replace the waste fluid bottle.
Confirm that there remains no waste fluid in the waste fluid tube.

2. Remove the connector to the level switch (waste fluid).
1
No.
Part name
Connector to the level switch (waste fluid)
Cover stay RR
3. Remove the waste fluid tube.

4. Loosen the cap of the waste fluid bottle.
Rev.-01
4-142
4 Parts Replacement
5. Loosen the nut of the level switch (waste fluid).
No.
Part name
Waste fluid bottle
Waste fluid tube
Cap of the waste fluid bottle
Nut of the level switch (waste fluid)
6. Pull out the nut of the level switch (waste fluid) and the cap of the waste fluid bottle from the connector
side of the level switch (waste fluid).
No.
Part name
Cap of the waste fluid bottle
Nut of the level switch (waste fluid)
7. Replace the waste fluid bottle.

8. Replace the level switch (waste fluid).
4-143
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.12 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly

This section describes the procedure to replace the roll media holder assembly.
4.12.1 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side

"4.2.19 Removing Media Guide R (Lower)" p.4-29
2. Release the roll media fixing lever.
No.
Part name
Roll media fixing lever
3. Pull out the roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side from the left side.
2
No.
Part name
Roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side
Roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_R side
4. Replace the roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side.
Rev.-01
4-144
4 Parts Replacement
NOTE
The roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side is an integral part.
4.12.2 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_R Side
Follow the same procedures as for the replacement of the roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side.
"4.12.1 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side" p.4-144
Pull out the roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_R side from the right side.
4-145
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.13 Replacing Winding Unit Section (Option)

This explains the replacement procedures for the winding unit section.
4.13.1 Removing Tension Arm

1. Remove the knurling and the screw (hexagon socket head cap screw with spring washer and flat washer
M4 8: 1 piece) that retains the right tension arm.
No.
1
Part name
Right tension arm
Screw that retains the right

tension arm (hexagon socket
head cap screw with spring
washer and flat washer M4x8)
Knurling
2.
Remove the tension support axis and the screw that retains the left tension arm (hexagon socket head cap
screw with spring washer and flat washer M4 8: 1 piece).
No.
Part name
Left tension arm
Screw that retains the left

tension arm (hexagon socket
washer and flat washer M48)
Tension support axis
3. Remove the tension arm.

4.13.2 Removing Take-up Holding Plate

1. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head cap screw with spring washer and flat washer M4 8: 4 pieces)
that retain the take-up holding plate on the origin side.
Rev.-01
4-146
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
Take-up holding plate
Screws that retain the take-up

holding plate (hexagon socket
2. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head cap screw with spring washer and flat washer M4 8: 4 pieces)
that retain the take-up holding plate opposite the origin side.
No.
Part name
Take-up holding plate

holding plate (hexagon socket
3. Remove the take-up holding plate.

4-147
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.13.3 Removing Take-up Cover

NOTE
Lower the release lever to the FREE side before removing the take-up cover.
1. Remove the screw (set screw: 1 piece) that retains the knob.
No.
2
Part name
Knob
Screw that retain the knob (set

screw)
2. Remove the screws (pan-head machine screw M3 8: 2 pieces) that retain the rubber foot.
No.
Part name
Rubber foot
Screws that retain the rubber

foot (Pan-head machine screw
M38)
3. Use pliers, etc. to turn the lever base, and detach it from the release cam.
Rev.-01
4-148
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
Release cam
Lever
4. Remove the screws (binding small screw M3 5: 7 pieces) that retain the take-up cover.
No.
1
Part name
Take-up cover

cover (binding small screw
M35)
5. Remove the take-up cover.

4-149
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.13.4 Replacing Scroller

(1) Replacing Holding Roller
1. Remove the E ring (E-6) that retains the holding roller using a driver.
No.
Part name
holding roller
E ring that retains the holding

roller (E-6)
2. Remove the holding roller and the bearing.

3. Fit the E ring (E-6) to the holding axis using a long-nose pliers.
(2) Replacing Holding Roller L

1. Remove the screw that retains the holding roller L on the scroller receiver (left).
No.
2
3
2. Remove the scroller receiver (left).

Rev.-01
4-150
Part name
Holding roller L
Screws that retain the holding

roller L
Scroller receiver (left)
4 Parts Replacement
(3) Replacing Drive Collar

1. Remove the screws (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 8: 2 pieces) that retain the
drive collar on the take-up scroller (left).
No.
2
3
Part name
Drive collar
Screws that retain the drive

collar (pan-head screw with
spring washer and flat washer
M3 8: 2 pieces)
Take-up scroller (left)
2. Remove the drive collar.

4-151
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.13.5 Replacing VJ Take-up CNT Board Assembly

(1) Removing Board Chassis
1. Remove the screws (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 6: 4 pieces) that retain the
board chassis on the chassis (out).
No.
2
Board chassis
Screws that retain the board

chassis (pan-head screw with
M3 6: 4 pieces)
Chassis (out)
3
1
Part name
2. Detach the motor cable, W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
connector to the VJ take-up CNT board assembly that appears.
2
1
Rev.-01
4-152
No.
Part name
VJ take-up CNT board assembly
Motor cable
W_ON sensor relay assembly,

W_OFF sensor relay assembly
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing VJ Take-up CNT Board Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screw that retains the board chassis.
"(1) Removing Board Chassis" p.4-152
1. Remove the cable of the DC cable assembly and the VJ take-up SW board assembly from the connector
to the VJ take-up CNT board assembly.
2
3
No.
Part name
DC cable assembly
Cable of the VJ take-up SW

board assembly
2. Remove the screws (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer polished M3 6: 4 pieces) that
retain the VJ take-up CNT board assembly on the board chassis.
2
No.
Part name
Screws that retain the VJ take-up

CNT board assembly (pan-head
screw with spring washer and
flat washer polished M3 6: 4
pieces)
Board chassis
3
2
3. Remove the VJ take-up CNT board assembly.

4-153
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(3) Replacing Power Board Assembly (of take-up section for foreign use)
NOTE
Remove the screws that retain the board chassis before replacing the power board assembly.
1. Detach the AC cable assembly and the DC cable assembly from the connector to the power board
assembly (of take-up section for foreign use).
1
3
No.
Part name
Power board assembly (of takeup section for foreign use)
AC cable assembly
DC cable assembly
2. Remove the screws (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer polished M 4 8: 4 pieces) that
retain the power supply cover on the hexagon spacer.
No.
Power supply cover
Screws that retain the power

supply cover (pan-head screw
with spring washer and flat
washer polished M 4 8: 4
pieces)
Hexagon spacer
Part name
3. Detach the hexagon spacers (4 pieces) from the power board assembly.
4. Detach the power board assembly (of take-up section for foreign use) from the board chassis.
Rev.-01
4-154
4 Parts Replacement
(4) Replacing VJ Take-up SW Board Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screws that retain the board chassis before replacing the VJ take-up SW board assembly.
1. Detach the cable of the VJ take-up SW board assembly from the connector to the VJ take-up CNT board
assembly.
No.
Part name

board assembly
2. Remove the screws (undersunk head screw M3 6: 2 pieces) that retain the SW mounting plate on the
board chassis.
No.
1
SW mounting plate
Screws that retain the SW

mounting plate (undersunk head
screw M3 6: 2 pieces)
Board chassis
4-155
Part name
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (pan-head machine screw M3 8: 4 pieces) that retain the VJ take-up SW board
assembly on the SW mounting plate.
No.
Part name
VJ take-up SW board assembly
Screw that retains the VJ take-up

SW board assembly (pan-head
machine screw M3 8: 4 pieces)
SW mounting plate
4. Remove the VJ take-up SW board assembly.

(5) Replacing AC Cable Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screws that retain the board chassis before replacing the AC cable assembly.
1. Remove the cable of the VJ take-up SW board assembly from the connector to the VJ take-up CNT board
assembly.
Rev.-01
4-156
No.
Part name

board assembly
4 Parts Replacement
2. Detach the AC cable assembly from the connector to the power board assembly (of take-up section for
foreign use).
No.
Part name
AC cable assembly
3. Replace the AC cable assembly.

(6) Replacing DC Cable Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screws that retain the board chassis before replacing the DC cable assembly.
1. Remove the screws that retain the DC cable assembly on the board chassis (pan-head screw with spring
washer and flat washer polished M4 8: 2 pieces).
No.
3
Part name
DC cable assembly
Screws that retain the DC cable

assembly (pan-head screw with
polished M4 8: 2 pieces)
Board chassis
2
1
4-157
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Detach the DC cable assembly from the connector to the power board assembly (of take-up section for
foreign use).
1
No.
Part name
DC cable assembly
3. Cut the KI tie that retains the DC cable assembly to replace the DC cable assembly.
4. To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure. Retain the DC cable assembly using the KI tie.
Rev.-01
4-158
4 Parts Replacement
4.13.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor

(1) Replacing W_ON Sensor Relay Assembly, W_OFF Sensor Relay Assembly
NOTE
Remove the screws that retain the board chassis before replacing W_ON sensor relay assembly or
W_OFF sensor relay assembly.
1. Remove the cable of the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
connector to the VJ take-up CNT board assembly.
No.
Part name
Cable of W_ON sensor relay

assembly and W_OFF sensor
relay assembly
2. Detach the W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the CR_HP sensor
and the lever sensor.
No.
Part name
CR_HP sensor, lever sensor

3. Replace the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly.
4-159
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor

NOTE
Remove the screws that retain the board chassis before replacing the CR_HP sensor or the lever
sensor.
1. Remove the cable of the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
connector to the VJ take-up CNT board assembly.
No.
Part name

retain the sensor mounting plate (87NX) on the right of the inside chassis.
Rev.-01
4-160
No.
Part name
Sensor mounting plate (87NX)
Screws that retain the sensor

mounting plate (87NX)
Right of the inside chassis
4 Parts Replacement
3. Detach the W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the CR_HP sensor
and lever sensor.
No.
Part name

4. Detach the CR_HP sensor and the lever sensor from the sensor mounting plate (87NX).
No.
Part name
Sensor mounting plate (87NX)
4-161
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.13.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take-up Motor Assembly

(1) Replacing Drive Roller
1. Remove the flat head screws (set screw with thin tip M4 6: 2 pieces) that retain the drive roller on the
drive axis C.
No.
2. Remove the drive roller.

Rev.-01
4-162
Part name
Drive roller
Screws that retain the drive

roller (set screw with thin tip M4
6: 2 pieces)
Drive axis C
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing VJ Take-up Motor Assembly

CAUTION
NOTE
Remove the following parts before replacing the VJ take-up motor assembly.
Take-up cover:
"4.13.3 Removing Take-up Cover" p.4-148
Screw for the board chassis:
retain the motor mounting plate on the right of the inside chassis.
No.
Part name
Motor mounting plate
Screws that retain the motor

mounting plate (pan-head screw
with spring washer and flat
washer polished M4 10: 3
pieces)
Right of the inside chassis
2. Detach the chain from the sprocket large.
No.
Part name
Chain
Sprocket large
4-163
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer polished M4 6:2 pieces) that
retain the axis holder on the motor mounting plate.
No.
3
4. Remove the bearings.

5. Replace the VJ take-up motor assembly.
Rev.-01
4-164
Part name
Axis holder
Axis holder
Motor mounting plate
5.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2
Preparation .............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine ............................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up ..................................................................................... 5-4
5.3
Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode ...................................................... 5- 6

5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode ..................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu ....................................... 5-8
5.4
Platen Adjustment Menu ...................................................................... 5- 10
5.5
Inspection Menu.................................................................................... 5- 11
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu ...................................................................... 5-12
5.5.2 Version Menu............................................................................... 5-13
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu ................................................................. 5-14
5.5.4 Sensor Menu ............................................................................... 5-15
5.5.5 Encoder Menu ............................................................................. 5-17
5.5.6 Fan Menu..................................................................................... 5-17
5.5.7 History Menu................................................................................ 5-18
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu ................................................................. 5-21
5.6
Ink Charging Menu................................................................................ 5- 22
5.7
Adjustment Menu.................................................................................. 5- 23
5.7.1 Head Nozzle Check Menu ........................................................... 5-25
5.7.2 Skew Check Menu ....................................................................... 5-27
5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu .............................................................. 5-28
5.7.4 Voltage Adjustment...................................................................... 5-33
5-1
Rev.-01
5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High Adjustment ................................................. 5-35

5.7.6 Side Margin Adjustment Menu ..................................................... 5-40
5.7.7 Test Printing Menu ....................................................................... 5-42
5.7.8 HeadWash Menu.......................................................................... 5-43
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu 2....................................................................... 5-43
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu............................................ 5-44
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu ............................................................... 5-45
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu ........................................................................... 5-46
5.8
Cleaning Menu .......................................................................................5- 47
5.9
Sample Printing Menu ...........................................................................5- 48
5.10 Time Check ............................................................................................5- 51

5.11 Parameter Menu.....................................................................................5- 52
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu ....................................................... 5-52
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu .............................................................. 5-55
5.12 Servo Setting .........................................................................................5- 62
5.13 Endurance Running Menu ....................................................................5- 65
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu.......................................................... 5-66
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu .......................................................... 5-67
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu................................................................ 5-68
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu ................................. 5-69
5.13.5 General Endurance Menu ............................................................ 5-70
5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu................................................. 5-71
5.14 Media Feed Menu...................................................................................5- 71
Rev.-01
5-2
5.15 ExControl Menu .................................................................................... 5- 72

5.15.1 Version......................................................................................... 5-73
5.15.2 Sensor ......................................................................................... 5-73
5.15.3 Mist Fan ....................................................................................... 5-76
5.15.4 Heater .......................................................................................... 5-77
5.15.5 History.......................................................................................... 5-77
5.16 PaperInitial Menu .................................................................................. 5- 78
5-3
Rev.-01
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis function adjusts the printing accuracy. It is used in the manufacturing process, adjustment,
and maintenance.
The self-diagnosis function is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
5.2 Preparation
Before you can use the self-diagnosis function, you must make the machine ready to call up the self-diagnosis
menu.
5.2.1
Preparations on Machine
Before starting up the self-diagnosis function, perform the following preparations.
(1) Setting Printing Media

Set a roll media for adjustment.
NOTE
In the self-diagnosis menu display status, the media type is automatically set to MF-3G.
During adjustment, use coated paper for the media.
(2) Connecting Power Cable

Connect the power cable to the machines inlet assembly and insert the power plug into an outlet.
NOTE
Do not connect three or more power plugs to one outlet.
5.2.2
Starting Up
To use the self-diagnosis function, you must first call up the self-diagnosis menu on the operation panel.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and self-diagnosis display
mode. To call up the self-diagnosis menu, follow the steps below.
Rev.-01
5-4
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the selfdiagnosis menu mode, press [Power] key to turn
the plotter off.
2. While holding down [Setting/value -] key,
[Setting/value +] key and [>] key in the operation
panel simultaneously, press [Power] key.
The system will enter the self-diagnosis mode
and display the self-diagnosis menu.
5-5
Rev.-01
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode

This section explains how to operate in the self-diagnosis mode as well as providing the list of available
diagnosis items.
5.3.1
Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode
Follow the operation flow shown below to operate the self-diagnosis mode.
TIP
For more detailed operation steps, refer to the flow chart of the applicable diagnosis item.
1. Press [<] key or [>] key in the operation panel to

select the item to be diagnosed, and press [Enter]
key.
The selected item is accepted.
If the item has a sub menu, the sub menu is
displayed.
2. When the LCD monitor in the operation panel

indicates a setting value, the value can be
modified.
Press [Setting/value +] key or [Setting/value -]
key in the operation panel to modify the value.
3. To save the modified value, press [Enter] key in

the operation panel.
The modified set value is stored and the next item
is displayed
NOTE
If you press [Cancel] key, or, [Setting/value
+] key or [Setting/value -] key, instead of
[Enter] key, the modification is not stored.
Rev.-01
5-6
4. To quit the diagnosis, press [Cancel] key in the

operation panel.
The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the
diagnosis menu.
5. To exit the self-diagnosis menu, press [Power]

key.
5-7
Rev.-01
5.3.2
Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu
The self-diagnosis menu includes the following diagnosis items.

Table 5-1 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
Platen Adjustment
Menu
Performs temperature setting for the platen heater to 42C.
Inspection Menu
Performs various inspections for memory size, version,

"5.5 Inspection
panel, sensor, encoder, fan, head waveform, etc. Displays the Menu" p.5-11
history.
Ink Charging Menu
Performs ink charging.
"5.6 Ink
Charging Menu"
p.5-22
Adjustment Menu
Performs various adjustments for the plotter mechanism.
"5.7
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-23
Cleaning Menu
Performs cleaning of the print head.
"5.8 Cleaning
Menu" p.5-47
Print Menu
Performs sample printing necessary for adjustment.
"5.9 Sample
Printing Menu" p.548
Time Setting Menu
Performs setting the time of the plotter.
"5.10 Time
Check" p.5-51
Parameter Menu
Configures various adjustment parameters.
"5.11
Parameter Menu"
p.5-52
Servo Menu
Performs adjustment for the servo motor.
"5.12 Servo
Setting" p.5-62
Endurance Running
Menu
Performs endurance running of the plotter mechanism.
"5.13
Endurance Running
Menu" p.5-65
Media feed Menu
Feeds media into the plotter forward or backward.
"5.14 Media
Feed Menu" p.5-71
ExControl Menu
Performs diagnosis of the controller board version, sensor,

and heater check. Displays the history.
"5.15 ExControl
Menu" p.5-72
PaperInitial Menu
Performs initialization and media detection setting.
"5.16
PaperInitial Menu"
p.5-78
Rev.-01
5-8
"5.4 Platen
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-10
[<] key
[Enter] key
Adj.Platen Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Test Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
InkCharge Menu
[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Cleaning Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[>] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Print Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
SetTime Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Servo Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
PaperFeed Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
ExControl Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
PaperInitial Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
5-9
Rev.-01
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu

In the platen adjustment menu, you can set the temperature of the pre-heater and platen heater to 42C.
Parts assembly and adjustment should be done in the condition.
* This item displays platen temperature only.
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
PlatenHeater 1
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
PlatenHeater 2
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Fig. 5-1 If the heater temp. does not reach 42C
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Platen Heater 1
[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Platen Heater 2
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Fig. 5-2 If Pla1 reaches 42C
* Pla2 is a reference value. Though Pla2 does not reach 42C, Pla1 reaches 42C and it will be complete.
NOTE
When the heater reaches the specified temperature, a buzzer is sounded.
Rev.-01
5-10
5.5 Inspection Menu

In the inspection menu, you can perform various inspections on the circuit boards, sensors, and fans.
The inspection menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-2 Diagnosis Items for Inspection Menu
Diagnosis
item
Contents
Reference
Memory size Displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board assembly.
"5.5.1 Memory
Size Menu" p.5-12
Version
Displays the versions of the firmware and MAIN board assembly.

Firmware version
Backup parameter version
Setting of dip switches
Revision of MAIN board assembly
"5.5.2 Version
Menu" p.5-13
Operation
panel
Used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and
LED.
"5.5.3
Operation Panel
Menu" p.5-14
Sensor
Displays the status of the following sensors.

CR_ORG sensor
Wiper sensor
Cover sensor
Lever sensor
Head slide sensor
Waste fluid box sensor
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
Head transistor thermistor sensor
Head thermistor sensor
"5.5.4 Sensor
Menu" p.5-15
Encoder
Displays the detected values from the following encoders.

CR (Carriage)
PF (Media feed)
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
Fan
Used to check if the following fans operate normally by turning them

"5.5.6 Fan
ON and OFF.
Menu" p.5-17
Suction fan
Cooling fan
Head fan
History
Used to check the following records. Used to initialize the serious

error history.
Maintenance history
Serious error history
"5.5.7 History
Menu" p.5-18
Head
waveform
Used to check the head-driving waveform.
"5.5.8 Head
Waveform Menu"
p.5-21
5-11
Rev.-01
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
Ram Capacity Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Version Menu
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Panel Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Sensor Menu
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Encoder Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Fan Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
History Menu
[>] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
Head Signal Menu

[>] key
5.5.1
[Cancel] key
[<] key
Memory Size Menu
This menu displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board assembly.
[Cancel] key
Test Menu
Rev.-01
5-12
5.5.2
Version Menu
This menu displays the following contents about the firmware and MAIN board assembly.
Firmware version
Setting of dip switches of MAIN board assembly
Revision of MAIN board assembly
TIP
Settings for the DIP switch on the MAIN board assembly are displayed as follows:
ON: 0, OFF: 1
Switch No.1: LSB
Switch No.2: MSB
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Firmware version
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Setting of DIP switches
of main board assembly
[>] key
[<] key
Revision of main board assembly
[>] key
5-13
Rev.-01
5.5.3
Operation Panel Menu
This menu is used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and LEDs.
(1) Operation Panel Key Check

When you press a key in the operation panel, the name of the key is displayed on the LCD. To exit the
operation panel key check, press [Cancel] key twice.
(2) LCD Check

The entire LCD screen is filled in black. You can check for any missing dots.
(3) LED Check

The following LEDs light up in the following order. The LCD displays the name of the LED that is currently
illuminated.
Power lamp
Data lamp
High lamp
Low lamp
Wave lamp
Fine & S.Fine lamp
Strong lamp
Normal lamp
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Operation Panel Key Check
[Cancel] key (twice)

[Enter] key
LCD Check
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
5-14
LED Check
5.5.4
Sensor Menu
This menu displays the sensor status on the operation panel.

If the displayed sensor status does not match the actual machine status, replace or adjust the relevant sensor
referring to the table below.
Table 5-3 Inspection Items in Sensor Menu
No.
Sensor name
Status in display
Reference
CR_HP sensor
ON / OFF
"4.7.5 Replacing CR Origin

Sensor" p.4-94
Waste fluid tank sensor
ON / OFF
Wiper sensor
ON / OFF
Maintenance cover sensor (L/R)
Open / Close
Lever sensor
Up / Down
"4.6.6 Replacing Lever Up

Sensor" p.4-67
P_EDGE sensor
0 to 255
"4.8.11 Replacing P_EDGE

Sensor Assembly" p.4-118
P_REAR sensor
0 to 255
"4.6.5 Replacing P_REAR

Sensor Assembly" p.4-65
Headslide
Low / High
Head thermistor
** C
10
H transistor 1, 2
** C
"4.8.9 Replacing Print Head"

p.4-114
-
NOTE
For the following sensors, the sensor sensitivity is displayed in decimal number.
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
5-15
Rev.-01
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
CR_HP Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Waste Tank Sensor
Wiper Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
Cover Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
Maintenance Cover L Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
Maintenance Cover R Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Lever Sensor
P_EDGE Sensor
P_REAR Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Head Gap Sensor

Head Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
H Transistor 1
H Transistor 2
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-16
5.5.5
Encoder Menu
This menu displays the detected values from the following encoders.
CR_ENC (Carriage)
PF_ENC (Media feed)
NOTE
For the encoder-detected values, the encoder pulse numbers are displayed in hexadecimal number.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
CR_ENC
[>] key
[<] key
PF_ENC
[>] key
5.5.6
Fan Menu
This menu is used to check if the fans operate normally by turning them ON and OFF.
If this operation is selected, the fans operate as follows:
Suction fan: Turns to ON
Cooling fan: Turns to OFF
Head fan: Turns to ON
If you press [Cancel] key, the suction fan is deactivated and the cooling fan is resumed, and the display shifts
to "Test 6: Fan".
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
5-17
Rev.-01
5.5.7
History Menu
This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history.
This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history and to initialize serious error history.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Maintenance history
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Serious error history
Initialization of the serious

communication
[>] key
(1) Maintenance History

This displays the past maintenance records on the following components.
Number of wiping of wiper
Number of CR motor activation cycles
Number of PF motor activation cycles
Number of printed copies
Number of cleaning cycles
Discharged amount of head ink (K, C, M, Y)
Pump count (number of pump wheel cycles)
Number of lock solenoid downs
NOTE
All values of maintenance history are indicated in hexadecimal form.
Rev.-01
5-18
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Frequenc[ of the wiper blade used
[>] key
[<] key
CR Motor driving (Unit : Operation count)
(Ink tube reciprocating count and the function)
[>] key
[<] key
PF Motor driving (Unit : 220 pulse)
[>] key
[<] key
Frequenc[ of printing
[>] key
[<] key
Frequenc[ of cleaning
[>] key
[<] key
Head 1-A Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Head 1-B Fire (Unit: Mdots)

[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Frequenc[of the pump operation

(Pump wheel rotation count)
Frequency of the lock solenoid moving down
[>] key
5-19
Rev.-01
(2) Serious Error History

Indicates serious error history.
NOTE
The serious error history does not include CPU error.
The serious error history menu indicates the history up to 64.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[<] key
[>] key
(3) Error Initialization

This menu is used to initialize the serious error history.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Rev.-01
5-20
5.5.8
Head Waveform Menu
This menu is used to check the head-driving waveform.
NOTE
The number of shots can be selected in a range from 1 to 655.
Magnification can be selected from the range of x1-1000000. Nozzle can be selected among A to
H and ALL.
This is a function that is not used in field work.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[-] key
[Enter]
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[Enter]
[+] key
[-] key
[Enter]
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[Enter]
5-21
Rev.-01
5.6 Ink Charging Menu

In the ink charging menu, you can charge ink.
The ink charging menu includes the following items.
Table 5-4 Ink Charging menu
Charging item
Contents
InkCharge
Performs initial ink charging.
LittleCharge
Performs a small amount of ink charging.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
* In LittleCharge process, the plotter charges a small amount of ink, which is one-fourth of
InkCharge main suction steps.
Rev.-01
5-22
5.7 Adjustment Menu

In this menu, you can align the printing position and correct the media feed operation.
The adjustment menu includes the following diagnosis menus.
Table 5-5 Diagnosis Items in Adjustment Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
Head nozzle check
Prints out a printing to check the ink discharge

performance of the head nozzles.
"5.7.1 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-25
Skew check
Performs media feed and detects the degree of skew in

media feed by the sensor.
"5.7.2 Skew Check

Menu" p.5-27
Head slant check
Prints out a printing to check for print head slant

(horizontal and vertical direction). Mechanical
adjustment must be performed as necessary.
"5.7.3 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-28
Volt. adjustment
Adjusts the print position of VSD3 - small dot.
"5.7.4 Voltage
Adjustment" p.5-33
Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment Low
Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance

(Uni-D) of PG Low and the position of the repeated
printing.
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Uni-D 240B: 240 cps (Banner)
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240B: 240 cps (Banner)
"5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D
Low/High Adjustment"
p.5-35
Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment High
Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance

(Uni-D) of PG High and the position of the repeated
printing.
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
"5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D
Low/High Adjustment"
p.5-35
Side margin
adjustment
Sets the side margin.
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu" p.540
Test printing
Prints out a head nozzle check pattern, an adjustment

"5.7.7 Test Printing
pattern, adjustment parameters, serious error history or a Menu" p.5-42
dot pattern.
HeadWash
Cleans the tubes and heads using cleaning liquid.
5-23
"5.7.8 HeadWash
Menu" p.5-43
Rev.-01
Table 5-5 Diagnosis Items in Adjustment Menu (Continued)

Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
HeadWash 2
Cleans the tube heads using shipping fluid to maintain

the condition at the time of shipping.
"5.7.9 HeadWash
Menu 2" p.5-43
Software counter
initialization
Clears various software counters.
"5.7.10 Software
Counter Initialization
Menu" p.5-44
Feed amount check
Used to check the media feed amount per band.
"5.7.11 Feed Pitch

Check Menu" p.5-45
Solid print check
Performs solid nozzle print check (color selection, nozzle

"5.7.12 Solid Print
selection and print direction selection are available).
Menu" p.5-46
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter] key
Nozzle Check Menu

[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Check Skew Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Head Slant Menu

[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Voltage Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Low Adjustment Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D High Adjustment Menu

[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Side Margin Adjustment Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Test Print Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Head Wash Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Software Counter Initialization Menu

[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Feed Pitch Check Menu

[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Solid Print Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-24
5.7.1
Head Nozzle Check Menu
In this menu, you can check if the head nozzles that have been charged can discharge ink correctly by printing
a sample printing. To check the head nozzle, follow the steps below.
1. Set media as necessary.
2. After media is set, the machine prints out head nozzle check patterns in the following modes.
1 pass, Uni-D
PF: 360 dpi
CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head nozzle check patterns for the following points.
Ink nozzle discharge amount (omission, discontinuity, meandering)
Satellite
T fence
Nozzle alignment in vertical direction
Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction
Nozzle check: Prints out the pattern in the order of A to H
Nozzle alignment in vertical direction: Prints out the pattern in the order of A to H
Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction (CW direction): Prints out the pattern in the order of A to H
Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction (CCW direction): Prints out the pattern in the order of A to H
5-25
Rev.-01
4. If any abnormal conditions are found in the ink discharge status of the head nozzles, perform cleaning.
TIP
"5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu" p.5-45
5. After cleaning, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
[Enter]
[Enter]
If media is not set
Media set
Display during adjustment printing
Finish printing
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter]
Rev.-01
5-26
5.7.2
Skew Check Menu
Feed the paper to check the skew size using sensor.

When you select this item from the Adjustment Menu, the plotter feeds the loaded media by one pass and
checks difference of the media edge positions before and after the media feed detected by the sensor.
NOTE
Before performing skew check, ensure that the media is set correctly.
The plotter determines the media setting reference position during first detection of media left edge.
Therefore, the media that is not set correctly may cause errors as below.
Media error occurs during skew check and plotter operation stops.
During media initial operation after power is turned on, "Undefined Paper" frequently occurs.
[Enter]
[Enter]
0.1 m increments
0.1 m to 10.0 m
[Enter]
If media is not set
Media set
Finish media initialization
Media edge detection finishes normaly
Table 5-6 Skew Amount Specification

Condition
Roll media
7m
Specification
2.5 mm or less
5-27
Rev.-01
5.7.3
Head Slant Check Menu
The plotter has 8 nozzle lines per head. This menu adjusts the slant of each nozzle line evenly.
Check the head slant from a sample printing, and perform mechanical adjustment if necessary.
Table 5-7 Head Slant Checking Items

Items
Contents
Head slant in horizontal direction
Head slant check in horizontal direction
Head slant in vertical direction
Head slant check in vertical direction
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter]
If setting is not in PG-Low
[Enter]
(1) Horizontal Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the horizontal direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.
2. After media is set, the plotter prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
1 pass, Uni-D
PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
Rev.-01
5-28
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
Head slant
A: Check the slant at this point.
B: Media feed direction
C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
A
20mm
4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-34
5-29
Rev.-01
5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.

Finish printing
[<] key

[>] key
Finish printing
[<] key
Output pattern
[>] key
(2) Vertical Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the vertical direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.
2. After media is set, the machine prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
1 pass, Uni-D
PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
A: Check the vertical slant angle at this point.
C: OK
D: Move the vertical-slant adjusting cam to the right.
Rev.-01
5-30
E: Move the vertical-slant adjusting cam to the left.
4-A
4-B
3-B
3-A
2-B
2-A
1-A
1-B
CCW
4-A
4-B
3-B
3-A
2-B
2-A
1-A
1-B
CW
4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.7.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)" p.7-36
5-31
Rev.-01
5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.

Finish printing
[<] key

[>] key
Finish printing
[<] key
Output pattern
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-32
5.7.4
Voltage Adjustment
This menu is used to adjust the voltage of VSD 3 small dot so that the print position will be corrected.
Check the small dot is on the center of the middle dots in the CR direction.
When adjusting, change the voltage up to 5V (0.1V increment) considering the current voltage as a basis.
NOTE
The initial value is set to values that are suited for the manufacturer genuine ink.
Items
Contents
240 CW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CW printing.
240 CCW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CCW printing.
320 CW
320 CCW
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[>] key
5-33
Rev.-01
The following figure shows a case for 240 CW.
[Enter] key
If media is not set
Media set
If head gap is PG-Low
Change head gap (to PG-Low)

If the temperature of the pre-heater and
platen heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Finish warm-up

Finish printing
Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key
to change unit to pulse
Volt range: -5V to 5V (0.1V)
VH3L-1 to VH3L-4
VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
Print pattern: 240 CW

2B 2A
1B
1A 2B
2A 1B
1A
CW
240CPS
B
C
A: Print direction
B: Adjust the voltage so that the small dot printed positions (shown as dot-line) are the same with the
middle dot printed positions (shown as solid line) in the CR direction.
C: Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
Rev.-01
5-34
Items
Speed
240 CW
CW 240 cps
320 CW
CW 320 cps
240 CCW
CCW 240 cps
320 CCW
CCW 320 cps
* Print pattern: Uni-D, 2 pass, 1A to 2B print

1st pass: prints middle dot
2nd pass: prints small dot
5.7.5
Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High Adjustment
Adjusts the gap of the print heads (in the CR moving direction) when the head is in the PG Low/High and the
print position of the head in repeatability printing.
To adjust, perform printing in repeatability printing and correct CW and CCW printing positions by inputting
parameters.
* Check the printing at the origin, center and the opposite side to origin, and perform adjustment so that the
gap is even.
Adjustment items are shown below.
Table 5-8 Uni-D / Bi-D Menu Items
Item
Contents
Uni-D 240
Adjusts CW at 240 cps. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320
Adjusts CW at 320 cps. PG Low or High
Uni-D 240B
Adjusts CW at 240 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320B
Adjusts CW at 320 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240
Adjusts Bi-D at 240 cps. PG Low or High
Bi-D 320
Bi-D 240B
Adjusts Bi-D at 240 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 320B

Table 5-9 Uni-D / Bi-D Adjustment Items
Item
Contents
Set up
Sets the selected parameter.
Print (when Bi-D is

selected, Print 1 is
displayed)
Prints pattern according to the selected item with the

current parameter.
5-35
Rev.-01
Table 5-9 Uni-D / Bi-D Adjustment Items (Continued)

Item
Contents
Print 2 (Print 2 is
displayed only when
Bi-D is selected)
Prints pattern according to the selected item with the

current parameter, plus with the values of 2 / 4 / 6 / 8
to the current parameter.
Check the gap of those printed patterns.
The actual procedure is as follows.

2. After that, the plotter starts printing automatically.
3. Check the printed pattern of CW adjustment.
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240 Low Print.)
The plotter prints the pattern in the order of 1A to 4B.
Uni-Lo
240cps
Banner
- +
- +
- +
- +
- +
4B 4A
3B
3A 2B
- +
- +
- +
2A 1B
1A
B
A: Media feed direction
B: Adjust the setting value so that these point matches.
Uni-D 240: Uni-Lo/Hi 240 cps
Uni-D 320: Uni-Lo/Hi 320 cps
Uni-D 240B: Uni-Lo/Hi 240 cps-Banner
Uni-D 320B: Uni-Lo/Hi 320 cps-Banner
* Either Lo or Hi is displayed where explained as Lo/Hi above.
Rev.-01
5-36
(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240 Low Print 1.)
The plotter prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle line.
* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Bi-Lo
240cps
Banner
- +
- +
- +
- +
- +
2A
2A 2A 2A 2A
- +
- +
- +
2A 2A
2A
B
Bi-D 240: Bi-Lo/Hi 240 cps
Bi-D 240B: Bi-Lo/Hi 240 cps-Banner
Bi-D 320B: Bi-Lo/Hi 320 cps-Banner
(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240B Low Print 2.)
The plotter prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle line.
Bi-Lo
240cps
Banner

$
#
$
#
$
#
$
#

5-37
Rev.-01

Check the printing at the origin, center and the opposite side to origin, and perform adjustment so that the gap
is even.
If any abnormal conditions are found, identify the gap of the print positions and enter it as the CW adjustment
parameter.
After that, print test pattern again as necessary.
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240.)
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[<] key
[>] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-38
Enter parameters when Bi-D is selected as follows.

(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240.)
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
The following shows a case for Print (or Print 1 / Print 2) is selected.
* Common for Bi-D, Uni-D
or select Print2
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to Low)
If the temperature of the preheater and
platen heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Displayed during adjustment printing

Finish printing
Back to Uni-D/Bi-D top menu
The following shows a case for Set up is selected (Uni-D 240).

Enter parameters when Uni-D is selected as follows.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
* Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key

to change the setting value.
1 pulse = 1/720 inch
Pulse range: -100 VQ 100
* #2 A is not displayed because the position is
referred as the basis when adjusting.
* #2 is displayed if High menu is selected.
Also, 240B or 320B is displayed
according to the mode selection.
[Enter] key
Returns to Uni-D 240 setup menu
[>] key
5-39
Rev.-01
(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240 - Setup is selected.)

Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key
to change unit to pulse
1 pulse = 1/2880 inch
Pulse range: -400 VQ400
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Back to UniD/Bi-D Top menu

[>] key
NOTE
The initial value is set to values that are suited for the manufacturer genuine ink.
5.7.6
Side Margin Adjustment Menu
This menu is used to adjust the printing margins.

To adjust the margins, follow the steps below.
2. After media is set, the detected width of the set media is displayed.
3. After media is set, the plotter prints out band feed correction adjustment patterns and cuts the media in
the following modes.
Black, 1 pass, Uni-D, 360 dpi
* If "check" is selected, black replaces magenta.
4. Check the printed side margin adjustment patterns for the measurement.
2
1
TOP
1: Side margin
2: Media feed direction
Rev.-01
5-40
5. Enter each measured value as the parameter.

(Input range: 0.0 to 20.0 mm (0.1 mm increments))
[Enter]
[Enter]
Press [Cancel] key to go back to
Adj. 7 SideMargin Menu
[Enter]
Press [Setting/value+] or [Setting/value-] key
to select initialize or check
[Enter]
After printing
Side Margin: 0.1 increments
Range: 0.0 - 20.0 mm
5-41
Rev.-01
5.7.7
Test Printing Menu
In this menu, you can print out adjustment patterns for checking various adjustment items.
2. After media is set, the machine prints out the following test printings.
Print1: Adjust ALL: Prints adjustment patterns.
Print2: Parameter ALL: Prints adjustment parameters.
Print3: Error history: Pints the serious error history and smart chip log.
3. Press the [Enter] key in the operation panel to start the selected test printing.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
Printing adjustment pattern
5-42
5.7.8
HeadWash Menu
This menu is used to purge ink and clean the heads before print head replacement.
1. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to determine the Head Cleaning Menu.
2. Remove all ink cartridges.
3. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to discharge ink.
4. After ink is discharged, install the head cleaning jig.
5. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to charge cleaning liquid.
6. After cleaning liquid is charged, remove the head cleaning jig.
Remove all cartridges and press [Enter] key to discharge ink
Finish Ink Discharge

Set cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to charge shipping liquid
After shipping liquid is charged
Remove cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to discharge

shipping liquid
5.7.9
HeadWash Menu 2
Maintain the conditions of the heads at the time of shipping by cleaning tubes and heads with shipping fluid.
* This function is not usually used in maintenance work.
Go to Adj 10: HeadWash2 after charging shipping fluid.
Enter
Enter
Insert cleaning cartridge, then press [Enter] key to fill shipping fluid
After shipping fluid is filled
Remove the cleaning cartridge,

then press [Enter] key to discharge the shipping fluid
5-43
Rev.-01
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu

This menu is used to initialize the software counters such as the ink consumption counter.
NOTE
The counters are initialized before delivery. Do not initialize them during maintenance.
The software counters that can be initialized through this menu are as follows.
Table 5-10 Software Counters to be Initialized
Counter
Initial
value
Ink consumption counter K
Ink consumption counter C
Ink consumption counter M
Ink consumption counter Y
Cumulative print timer
User not-filled flag
Not-filled
Not-filled flag
Not-filled
Pressing the [Enter] key in the operation panel performs the software counter initialization. Pressing [Cancel]
key cancels the initialization.
[Enter]
[Enter]
Adjustment Menu
[Enter]
after a few seconds
Rev.-01
5-44
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu

In this menu, you can check the media feed amount for one band by reviewing a sample printing. There are
no adjustment items.
To check the feed pitch, follow the steps below.
2. Select "Adj 12: SendPitch".
3. Select the feed pitch.
Pattern 1: Prints at intervals of 360 (720) dpi. This resolution causes no gaps.
Pattern 2: Prints at intervals of 1440 dpi. This causes a gap in one line out of four lines.
4. Pattern 1 is printed as shown below.
Feed amount
for one band
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Finish Printing or [Cancel] key
[>] key
5-45
Rev.-01
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu

This menu is used to print solid print patterns with head on both ends.
A printed patter is as follows.
5mm
B
Specified color nozzles of both series A and B
Nozzles for series B only

Nozzles for series A only
20mm
5mm

B: 100% printing
Print the pattern in the order of 1A&1B, 1B&1B, 1A&1A.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Press [>] or [<] key to select color to check
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
ALL: All nozzles

ODD: Odd numbered nozzles
EVEN: Even numbered nozzles
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
CW: Eject ink when CW scanning

CCW: Eject ink when CCW scanning
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-46
5.8 Cleaning Menu

In this menu, you can clean ink from the print heads.
The cleaning menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-11 Diagnosis Items in Cleaning Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Economy
Performs economy cleaning
Normal
Performs normal cleaning
Powerful
Performs powerful cleaning
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
Economy Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
Normal Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Strong Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[Enter]
5-47
Rev.-01
5.9 Sample Printing Menu

This menu prints out a sample printing.
The sample printing menu includes the following items.
Table 5-12 Diagnosis Items in Sample Printing Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Adjust ALL
Prints adjustment patterns.
Parameter ALL
Prints out the set values of various adjustment items.
Error history
Prints the serious error history and smart chip log.
NOTE
If you have not registered the serial number of the machine, you must enter the number before you
can start the adjustment variable printing.
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Adjust Pattern printing

[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
Adjust Parameter printing
Error record printing
[<] key
TIP
This is the same as the "5.7.7 Test Printing Menu" p.5-42.
Rev.-01
5-48
Sample printing (adjust ALL)
5-49
Rev.-01
TIP
When adjustment values are initial values, "*" is displayed at the head of the adjustment variable.
Sample printing (Error history)
Rev.-01
5-50
5.10 Time Check

Checks the date and time managed by the RTC (Real Time Clock) on the main board.
NOTE
Time settings cannot be performed in this menu. To set time, use the date and time setting function
in the MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant.
"7.3.8 RTC Date & Time Setting" p.7-24
[Enter]
Press [Enter] or [Cancel] key
to go back to Time Setting Menu
5-51
Rev.-01
5.11 Parameter Menu

In this menu, you can modify the set values of various adjustment items (adjustment parameters).
The parameter menu includes the following items.
Table 5-13 Diagnosis Items in Parameter Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
Initialization
Initializes the adjustment parameters.
"5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-52
Update
Updates the adjustment parameters.
"5.11.2 Parameter
Update Menu" p.5-55
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Initialization Menu

[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Update Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu

This menu initializes the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be initialized through this menu are
as follows.
Uni-D / Bi-D parameter, wiper, CR motor, PF motor, pump)
Rev.-01
5-52
Initialization of all items
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
key
[>] key
(1) Voltage Adjustment

This menu updates the voltage adjustment parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-14 Voltage Adjustment Item
Items
Contents
240 CW
240 CCW
320 CW
320 CCW
5-53
Rev.-01
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
(2) Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High

This menu updates the Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment parameter.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-54
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu

This menu updates the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be updated through this menu are as
follows.
NOTE
The updated parameters will not be stored in the flash memory unless the system power is turned
OFF.
Head rank
Voltage adjustment
Uni-D/Bi-D Low
Uni-D/Bi-D High
Side margin
Not-filled flag
Serial number
Smart chip name update
DebugBit
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Head Parameter Update Menu
Head Voltage Offset Menu
Uni-D/Bi-D Low Update Menu
Uni-D/Bi-D High Update Menu
Side Margin Update Menu

Ink Parameter Update Menu
Serial No.Update Menu
Debug Bit
[Cancel] key
[>] key
5-55
Rev.-01
(1) Head Rank

This menu updates the head rank parameters. The head rank is used to determine the print head driving
voltage and correct the head temperature.
After head rank is entered, the system shifts to the Ink Charge Menu.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Error will occur if input value is wrong.

[Cancel]
[Enter]
Press [Enter] key to retry

Initial Ink charge will not executed.
Head ID will be updated.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
(2) Voltage Adjustment

This menu updates the voltage adjustment parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Rev.-01
5-56
Table 5-15 Voltage Adjustment Item

Items
Contents
240 CW
Adjusts the VSD 3-L (S) at 240 cps. CW printing.
240 CCW
Adjusts the VSD 3-L (S) at 240 cps. CCW printing.
320 CW
Adjusts the VSD 3-L (S) at 320 cps. CW printing.
320 CCW
Adjusts the VSD 3-L (S) at 320 cps. CCW printing.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] keys
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
If 240 CW is selected
Offset range: -5V to 5V (0.1V increment)
VH3L-1 to VH3L-4
VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
(3) Uni-D / Bi-D Low

This menu updates the Uni-D/ Bi-D adjustment parameter.
Table 5-16 Uni-D / Bi-D Update Item
Item
Contents
Uni-D 240
Adjusts Uni-D at 240 cps. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320
Adjusts Uni-D at 320 cps. PG Low or High
Uni-D 240B
Adjusts Uni-D at 240 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320B
Adjusts Uni-D at 320 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240
Bi-D 320
Bi-D 240B
Bi-D 320B
5-57
Rev.-01
Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment parameters are updated.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240 is selected.)

[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
If any value has been changed
[Enter]
* Press [Setting/Value +] or [Setting/Value -] key

to change the set value
Range: -100 to 100
* 2A is not displayed because the value is the basis
* If High is selected, the values of #2 will be displayed
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-58
(4) Side Margin

This updates the side margin parameters.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Press [Setting/Value +] or [Setting/Value -] key

to change the set value
Range: 0.0mm to 20.0mm
(This sets the distance between the print head
and media edge sensor.)
When any parameter has been changed
[Enter]
(5) Ink Not-filled Flag

This updates the ink parameter. The setting items are as follows.
User/:
Charge: Initial wash completed, ink not filled.
User/Init: Not ChargeFInitial wash incomplete, ink not filled
User/Init: Charge: Initial wash completed, ink filled.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Press [Setting/Value +] or [Setting/Value -] key

to change the setting items
User/ : Charge
User/Init:Not Charge
User/Init: Charge
[Enter]
NOTE
When selecting "Reset", be sure to install the cartridge.
5-59
Rev.-01
(6) Serial Number Entry

This is for entering the serial number.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Enter Serial Number (digit by digit)
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key

[Enter]
TIP
The 4th digit from the beginning of the serial number is as follows.
J: Japan
A: America
E: Europe
K: Overseas third market
R: Korea
(7) Debug bit Update

This menu is for updating the debug bit.
The debug bit is used for testing.
Rev.-01
5-60
TIP
The debug bit is displayed in binary digits. The setting values and initial values at the time of shipping
is as follows.
At the time of shipping: 000000
Initial value: 000000
= ?MG[
=?MG[
= ?MG[
=?MG[
= ?MG[
=?MG[
= ?MG[
=?MG[
* Debug Bit (Set digit by digit)

Press [Settting/Value] or [Setting/Value] key
to change the value
* The default value for all items is 0
= ?MG[
NOTE
This is a function that is not used in field work.
5-61
Rev.-01
5.12 Servo Setting

In this menu, you can change the servo settings.
* Because this is a menu for evaluating problems of the unit (noise, vibration), and improving the image
(measures for vertical unevenness) normally, do not change these parameters.
Table 5-17 Servo Setting Item
Items
Contents
240 cps CW
Servo setting at CR CW direction, 240 cps
240 cps CCW
Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 240 cps
320 cps CW
Servo setting at CR CW direction, 320 cps
320cps CCW
Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 320 cps

Table 5-18 Servo Adjustment Item
Items
Rev.-01
Contents
Proportional gain
Sets proportional gain
Integral gain
Sets integral gain
Low-pass filter
Sets low-pass filter
PWM scale
Sets PWM scale
Sets C
5-62
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter]
When selecting 300cps CW
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter]
Change the value (unit to count) by pressing
[setting/value+] or [setting/value-] key
* The minimum / maximum / count value for each item is shown blow.
Table 5-19 Max./Min./Count Values for Servo Setting
Items
Min.
Max.
Count
GP (Proportional gain)
0 2000
0 7800
0 200
GI (Integral gain)
0 0002
0 0800
GLPF (Low-pass filter)
255
PWM (PWM scale)
10
15
C (Position gain)
30
60
The initial values of the setting items are as follows.

When the speed is the same, the initial values of CW and CCW will be the same.
5-63
Rev.-01
Table 5-20 Initial Servo Settings

Items
Rev.-01
Min.
Max.
240cps
320cps
GP (Proportional gain)
0 5400
0 4e00
GI (Integral gain)
0 40
0 30
GLPF (Low-pass filter)
228
219
PWM (PWM scale)
13
13
C (Position gain)
45
45
5-64
5.13 Endurance Running Menu

Performs endurance running of mechanicals and the head.
The endurance running menu includes the following items.
Table 5-21 Diagnosis Items in Endurance Running Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
CR motor
Performs carriage stroke.
"5.13.1 CR Motor
Endurance Menu" p.566
PF motor
Drives the PF motor.
"5.13.2 PF Motor
Pump
Drives the pump motor assembly.
"5.13.3 Pump
Nozzle print
Performs sequential print operation of the print head.
"5.13.4 Print Head

Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-69
General endurance
Performs endurance running on the CR and PF

concurrently.
"5.13.5 General
Confirmation
Confirms the number of endurance running cycles.
"5.13.6 Endurance
Running Check Menu"
p.5-71
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
CR Motor Endurance Menu
PF Motor Endurance Menu

[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Pump Motor Endurance Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Sequential Printing Endurance Menu

[>] key
General Endurance Menu

[>] key
Endurance Running Check Menu

[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
5-65
Rev.-01
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the CR motor.
You can operate the carriage stroke according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-22 Set Items in CR Motor Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Remark
Running speed (CW,

CCW)
Set the carriage running speed

(CW direction, CCW direction)
240, 320, (400)

Unit: cps
* 400 cps cannot be
selected depending
on versions.
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance

running cycles
-1 to 10000
CAUTION
When the CR motor endurance running is performed, note the following:

Install available ink cartridges.
If the CR motor endurance running is performed without ink cartridges, ink inside the tube
may leak through the ink holder during the carriage movement.
TIP
If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats endurance
running until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If the
number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
The carriage moving distance is fixed to the maximum value of print area.
[Enter]
[Enter]
CW-speed
[Enter]
CCW-speed
[Enter]
Endurance Count
[Enter]
Performing endurance
[Enter] or [Cancel]
Rev.-01
5-66
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the PF motor.
You can drive the PF motor according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-23 Set Items in PF Motor Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Remark
Media feed amount
Set the media feed amount 0.1 to 100

per endurance running
cycle.
Unit: mm
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of

endurance running cycles.
-1 to 10000
TIP
The following table shows the motor moving parameters to media feed amount.
Speed
35CPS
Acceleration
0.1G
Deceleration
0.1G
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If the
number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
[Enter]
[Enter]
Enter a media feed amount by using .
Range : 0.1 to 100.0 mm
[Enter]
Endurance Count
[Enter]
Performing endurance
[Enter] or [Cancel]
5-67
Rev.-01
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the pump motor assembly.
You can drive the pump motor assembly according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-24 Set Items in Pump Motor Assembly Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Running speed
Set the running speed of

pump motor assembly.
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance -1 to 10000

running cycles.
Remark
Super high / High /

Normal / Low
TIP
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If
the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Endurance Count
[Enter]
[Enter] or [Cancel ]
Rev.-01
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[>] key
Performing Endurance
[Enter]
5-68
The pump endurance running sequence is as follows.

1. Pump endurance running starts.
2. Pump phase detection is performed.
3. Rotates with the specified suction speed. This rotation is counted as one cycle.
Step 2 above is repeated the number of times specified as follows.
Super high: 4000
High: 3000
Normal: 2000
Low: 1000
4. Pump release is performed.
5. Pump endurance running ends.
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the plot head.
In the sequential plotting endurance menu you can operate sequential plotting endurance operation on the plot
head according to your desired settings.
Table 5-25 Set Item in Sequential Plotting Endurance Menu
Set item
Number of endurance
running cycles
Contents
Set value
Set the number of

endurance running
cycles.
Remark
-1 to 10000
-
TIP
[Enter]
[Enter]
Endurance Count
[Enter]
Performing endurance running
[Enter] or [Cancel]
5-69
Rev.-01
5.13.5 General Endurance Menu

This menu performs the general endurance running.
You can operate various driving systems according to your desired settings.
The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-26 Set Items in General Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Remark
Running speed (CW,

CCW)
Set the carriage running

speed (CW direction,
CCW direction).
240, 320, (400)

* 400 cps cannot be
selected depending on
versions.
Unit: cps
Media feed amount
Set the media feed

amount per endurance
running cycle.
0.1 to 100
Unit: mm
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of

endurance running
cycles.
-1 to 10000
TIP
In the general endurance menu, the following operations are performed as one cycle of endurance
running:
Carriage stroking: 1 stroke
Media feed: 1 cycle
If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats stroking
until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
[Enter]
[Enter]
CW-speed
[Enter]
CCW-speed
[Enter]
Media feed amount
[Enter]
Endurance count
[Enter]
Performing endurance running
[Enter] or [Cancel]
Rev.-01
5-70
5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu

In this menu, you can confirm the number of endurance running cycles that have been already finished.
The number of endurance running cycles is stored in NVRAM in the system. Therefore, even if a serious error
occurs during endurance running, you can confirm the number of finished cycles just before the occurrence
of the serious error.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Number of endurance running cycles
for the CR Motor
[>] key
[<] key
for the PF Motor
[>] key
[<] key
for the Head Lock
[>] key
[<] key
for the Pump motor
[>] key
[<] key
for Sequential Printing
[>] key
[<] key
Number of general endurance running cycles
[>] key
5.14 Media Feed Menu

In this menu, you can feed media into the plotter frontward or backward.
The mechanical initialization should be done if it is not performed yet.
[Enter]
[] key: Feeds forward
[+] key: Feeds backward
TIP
This is the same function as the "6.3.4 Media Feed Menu" p.6-7
5-71
Rev.-01
5.15 ExControl Menu

In this menu, you can diagnose the equipment on the controller board.
Table 5-27 Controller Board Check Item
Items
Contents
Remark
Version
Firmware, board revision
Sensors
Tank status, electromagnetic valve, pre-heater

thermistor, platen thermistor 1/2, after-heater
thermistor, ink ID for 4 cartridges, ink NOT sensor for
4 cartridges, ink END sensor for 4 cartridges
Mist fan
Checks mist fan operation
Heater
Pre-heater, platen heater, after-heater
History
Maintenance history confirmation
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter]
Version Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
Sensor Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
Mist fan Menu

[Cancel]
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
Heater Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
History Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-72
5.15.1 Version
In this menu, you can check the ROM version of the controller board firmware, and the version of the
controller board. The firmware version (AP version) is displayed as XX.XX. The controller board version
is displayed in hex format (2 digits).
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[<] key
[>] key
[>] key
5.15.2 Sensor
The status of the following sensors on the controller board is displayed.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter]
Tank Status Menu

[Cancel]
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
[Cancel]
[>] key
[<] key
Electromagnetic
Valve Check Menu
[Enter]
Miscellaneous Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key
5-73
Rev.-01
(1) Tank Status

Displays the status of sub tank and electromagnetic valve.
[<] key
[<] key
[<] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
(2) Electromagnetic Valve Check

Checks if the electromagnetic valve on the sub tank operates correctly.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-74
Pressing [Enter] key or [Cancel] key turns on/off the electromagnetic valve.
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
(3) Miscellaneous
Displays the status of the following sensors on the panel.
Pre-heater thermistor
Platen heater thermistor
After-heater thermistor
Ink ID for 4 cartridges
Ink NOT sensor for 4 cartridges
5-75
Rev.-01
Ink END sensor for 4 cartridges
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Pre-heater1 condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Pre-heater2 condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Platen Heater1 condition display
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Platen Heater2 condition display
After Dryer heater1 condition display
After Dryer heater2 condition display
K Ink ID condition display
C Ink ID condition display
M Ink ID condition display

[>] key
[<] key
Y Ink ID condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Ink NOT sensor condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Ink END sensor condition display
[>] key
5.15.3 Mist Fan

Checks if the mist fan operates correctly.
When this menu is selected, the mist fan is turned on (activated).
Rev.-01
5-76
5.15.4 Heater
In this menu, you can check whether pre-heater, platen heater, and after-heater works properly or not. The
plotter sets the temperature at 50C and controls the selected heater process. Press [Cancel] key to stop the
operation.
If the temperature reaches to the set value, the plotter keeps the temperature control.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] keyWhen selecting Pre
5.15.5 History
You can check the maintenance history of the controller board control device.
The history is displayed in H (hour) / M (min.) / S (sec.).
Total operating time of each heater shows the period from when the plotter is used in self-diagnosis mode.
Daily operating time is not counted.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Time of using Pre-heater
[>] key
[<] key
Time of using Platen Heater
[>] key
[<] key
Time of using After Dryer Heater
[>] key
5-77
Rev.-01
5.16 PaperInitial Menu

In this menu, you can set the media detection method in the self-diagnosis mode. The default value is the same
as the one in the normal operation mode.
Select either Top & Width / Width / Off. When Off is selected, you can set the media width in the media width
setting menu.
Table 5-28 Media Detection Item
Items
Contents
Top & Width
Normal media detection mode
Width
Detects media width.
Off
Does not detect media.

s
[Enter]
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
When Off is selected

Input media width
Press [Setting/value +] or [Setting/value -] key
to change the value
Range: 1000 to 1625 mm
Rev.-01
5-78
6.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2
Operations in Maintenance Mode 2....................................................... 6- 2

6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2 ............................................ 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2..................................................... 6-3
6.3
Maintenance Menu.................................................................................. 6- 3
6.3.1 Counter Display Menu ................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu ............................................................ 6-6
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu........................................................................ 6-7
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu .......................................................................... 6-7
6-1
Rev.-01
6.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the maintenance mode.
The maintenance mode provides the user with functions of displaying and initializing the life counters. It is
used in the manufacturing process, adjustment, and maintenance.
The maintenance mode is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the operation
panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2

This section explains how to start up and operate the maintenance mode as well as provides the list of
available diagnosis items.
6.2.1
Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2
To use the maintenance mode 2, you must first call up the maintenance menu on the operation panel.
The maintenance menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and setup menu display
mode. To run the maintenance menu, follow the steps below.
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the setup
menu mode, press the [Power] key to turn the
power off.
2. While holding down [Setting/value -] key, [>]
key and [<] key in the operation panel
simultaneously, press [Power] key.
The maintenance mode will start running and
display the maintenance menu.
Rev.-01
6-2
6.2.2
Operating Maintenance Mode 2
For the operation method of maintenance mode 2, refer to "5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-6,
and perform operations accordingly.
6.3 Maintenance Menu

The maintenance menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 6-1 Diagnosis Items in Maintenance Menu
Diagnosis item
Counter: Indication
Contents
Reference
Displays the life counter.
"6.3.1 Counter Display

Menu" p.6-4
Counter: Init Counter Initializes the life counter.
"6.3.2 Counter
Initialization Menu" p.6-6
Counter: Print
Prints the life counter values.
"6.3.3 Counter Print

Menu" p.6-7
PaperFeed
Feeds media into the printer frontward or backward.
"6.3.4 Media Feed

Menu" p.6-7
Previous menu
[Enter] key
Counter display
Next menu
[Cancal] key
Previous menu
[Enter] key
Counter initialization
Next menu
Previous menu
[Cancal] key
[Enter] key
Counter print
Next menu
Previous menu
[Cancal] key
[Enter] key
Media feed
Previous menu
6-3
[Cancal] key
Rev.-01
6.3.1
Counter Display Menu
This menu displays the life counters. It consists of the following diagnosis items.
NOTE
All life counters are displayed in decimal number.
Table 6-2 Diagnosis Items in Counter Display Menu

Diagnosis item
Contents
Used Ink K
Displays the ink consumption (K) counter.
Used Ink C
Displays the ink consumption (C) counter.
Used Ink M
Displays the ink consumption (M) counter.
Used Ink Y
Displays the ink consumption (Y) counter.
Print Number
Displays the total number of printed copies.
CR Motor
Displays the life counter of the CR motor.
PF Motor
Displays the life counter of the PF motor.
PUMP
Displays the life counter of the pump unit.
HEAD K1, K2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (K).
HEAD C1, C2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (C).
HEAD M1, M2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (M).
HEAD Y1, Y2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (Y).
Cleaner
Displays the life counter of the cleaning unit.
Rev.-01
6-4
[Enter]
[>] key
[<] key
Ink consumption (K) counter
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Ink consumption (C) counter
Ink consumption (M) counter

[>] key
[<] key
Ink consumption (Y) counter
[>] key
[<] key
Total number of printed copies
[>] key
[<] key
Waste ink amount counter
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Life counter of the CR motor

Life counter of the PF motor
Life counter of the pump unit
[>] key
[<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (K1)
[>] key
[<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (K2)
[>] key
[<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (C1)
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (C2)
Life counter of the head nozzle (Y1)

Life counter of the head nozzle (Y2)
Life counter of the head nozzle (M1)
Life counter of the head nozzle (M2)
Life counter of the cleaner head

[>] key
6-5
Rev.-01
6.3.2
Counter Initialization Menu
This menu initializes the life counters. The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are as follows.
Table 6-3 Diagnosis Items in Counter Initialization Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Print Num.
Initializes the total print counter.
Ink
Initializes the ink amount counter.
All
Initializes the life counter.
NVRAM
Initializes the NVRAM.
Timer
Initializes the timer.
CR Motor
Initializes the CR motor life counter.
PF Motor
Initializes the PF motor life counter.
Head Unit
Initializes the head nozzle life counter.
Cleaning
Initializes the life counter of the cleaning unit.
PUMP
Initializes the life counter of the pump unit.
Shipping
Batch initializing before shipping

(Print Num., CR Motor, PF Motor, Cleaning, PUMP)
[Enter]
[<] key
Rev.-01
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
key
6-6
6.3.3
Counter Print Menu
This menu prints the life counter values.
[Enter]
[Enter]
After media is set
6.3.4
Media Feed Menu
This menu feeds media into the printer frontward or backward.

The mechanical initialization should be performed, if it is not performed yet.
[Enter]
[] key: Feeds forward
[+] key: Feeds backward
TIP
This is the same function as the "5.14 Media Feed Menu" p.5-71.
6-7
Rev.-01
Rev.-01
6-8
7 Adjustment
Adjustment
7.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 7- 3
7.2
Adjustment Item...................................................................................... 7- 3
7.3
Working with Dedicated Network Software.......................................... 7- 7

7.3.1 Parameter Backup ......................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools................................................................................ 7-9
7.3.3 Required Environment ................................................................. 7-10
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters.................................................................. 7-15
7.3.5 Firmware Installation.................................................................... 7-16
7.3.6 Sending Parameters .................................................................... 7-22
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation............................................................ 7-23
7.3.8 RTC Date & Time Setting ............................................................ 7-24
7.4
Steel Belt Tension Adjustment ............................................................ 7- 26

7.4.1 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-26
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure ................................................................. 7-26
7.5
PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment ...................................... 7- 29

7.5.1 Adjustment Procedure ................................................................. 7-29
7.6
CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment ................................. 7- 31

7.6.1 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-31
7.6.2 Adjustment Procedures................................................................ 7-31
7.7
Head Accuracy Adjustment ................................................................. 7- 34

7.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) ............................................ 7-34
7.7.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)................................................... 7-36
7-1
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.8
PG Height Adjustment ..........................................................................7- 38

7.8.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-38
7.8.2 Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 7-38
7.9
P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment .............................................7- 40

7.9.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-41
7.10 P_REAR Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment .............................................7- 43

7.10.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-44
Rev.-01
7-2
7 Adjustment
7.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on necessary adjustment items and procedures.
TIP
"8.4 Jigs and Tools" p.8-5
7.2 Adjustment Item

This section describes the adjustment items required in part replacement procedures.
When you adjust or replace any of the maintenance parts listed in "Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List", you must
always adjust the plotout quality using the self-diagnosis function referring to Table 7-1"Adjustment Item
List"(p.7-3).
Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List
Part replaced or
adjusted
Printer head
Adjustment
order
Adjustment item
Reference
Head rank input (including initial ink

charge)
"(1) Head Rank"

p.5-56
"5.6 Ink Charging
Menu" p.5-22
Head nozzle check
"5.7.1 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-25
Head slant check
"5.7.3 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-28
"7.7 Head
Accuracy
Adjustment" p.7-34
Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment

Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment
"5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D
Low/High
Adjustment" p.5-35
Test printing
"5.7.7 Test
Printing Menu" p.5-42
Reset of head unit life counter
"5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-52
7-3
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List(Continued)

Part replaced or
adjusted
Main board
assembly
CR motor assembly
Rev.-01
Adjustment
order
Adjustment item
Reference
Parameter backup
"7.3.1 Parameter
Backup" p.7-9
Firmware installation
"7.3.5 Firmware
Installation" p.7-16
Head rank input (no need for initial ink

charge)
"(1) Head Rank"

p.5-56
Head nozzle check
"5.7.1 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-25

"5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D
Low/High
Adjustment" p.5-35
Side margin adjustment
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
P_EDGE sensor sensitivity adjustment
"7.9 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-40
P_REAR sensor sensitivity adjustment
"7.10 P_REAR
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-43
Test printing
"5.7.7 Test
CR speed reduction belt tension

adjustment
"7.6 CR Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-31
CR belt tension adjustment
"7.6 CR Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-31

"5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D
Low/High
Adjustment" p.5-35
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
Test printing
"5.7.7 Test
7-4
7 Adjustment

Part replaced or
adjusted
Adjustment
order
PF motor assembly
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
P_ENC position adjustment
"7.5 PF Encoder
Assembly Position
Adjustment" p.7-29
Test printing
"5.7.7 Test
P_EDGE sensor sensitivity adjustment
"7.9 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-40
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
PF_ENC assembly mounting position

adjustment
"7.5 PF Encoder
Assembly Position
Adjustment" p.7-29
PF_ENC inspection
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
Test printing
"5.7.7 Test
CR encoder inspection
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17

"5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D
Low/High
Adjustment" p.5-35
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
Test printing
"5.7.7 Test
"7.6 CR Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-31
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
P_EDGE sensor
assembly
PF_ENC assembly
T fence
CR driven pulley
Adjustment item
7-5
Reference
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment

Part replaced or
adjusted
Adjustment
order
Carriage assembly
PG height adjustment
"7.8 PG Height
Adjustment" p.7-38
"7.6 CR Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-31
CR encoder inspection
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
P_EDGE sensor adjustment
"7.9 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-40
Sequential printing endurance operation

"5.13.4 Print Head
check
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-69
Head rank input
"(1) Head Rank"

p.5-56
"5.13.4 Print Head
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-69
"5.7.6 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-40
Head nozzle check
"5.7.1 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-25
Head slant check
"5.7.3 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-28
10
Head slant check
"7.7 Head
Accuracy
Adjustment" p.7-34
11

"5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D
Low/High
Adjustment" p.5-35
12
Test printing
"5.7.7 Test
Rev.-01
Adjustment item
7-6
Reference
7 Adjustment
7.3 Working with Dedicated Network Software

In this product, download and installation of parameters, installation, firmware installation, and time settings
are performed through the network using dedicated software.
This section explains work procedures for when the "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" is used.
When using other MUTOH network software, refer to the instruction manuals for the software.
CAUTION
Never provide "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" to users because the software
enables upload of printer internal parameters to PCs.
In case of MAIN board replacement, work in the following order.

1. Setting up working environment:
2. Receiving parameters:
3. Replacing MAIN board:
4. DIP switch settings:
"7.3.3 Required Environment" p.7-10
"7.3.4 Receiving Parameters" p.7-15

"(1) DIP Switch Settings on the Main Board" p.7-16
5. Transferring firmware to plotter:
"(2) Firmware Transfer" p.7-18
6. Confirming completion of installation to plotter:

Plotter" p.7-20
7. Sending parameters:
"(3) Confirming Completion of Installation to
"7.3.6 Sending Parameters" p.7-22
NOTE
When only performing firmware version upgrade, the steps of (2), (3), (4), and (7) are not required.
7-7
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
Workflow for Firmware installation after MAIN board replacement
Confirm IP Adress of Printer
Set IP Address of PC
Operation for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer

Assistant
Operation for operation panel
Maintenance work
Execute Board Manager mode
Parameter settings
accessible?
NO
YES
Save parameters
Replace MAIN board
Set DIP SW position to ON
Select default IP address
Install Firmware
Confirm Firmware installation
NO
Parameters of old board

is saved?
YES
Initialize NV RAM
Send parameters to printer
Turn off printer
Input parameters manually
Set DIP SW position to OFF
End
Rev.-01
7-8
7 Adjustment
Workflow for Firmware installation (Version-up Procedure)
Confirm IP Adress of Printer
Operation using MUTOH Maintenance

Engineer Assistant
Operation using operation panel
Set IP Address of PC
Execute Board Manager mode
Install Firmware
Confirm Firmware installation
End
7.3.1
Parameter Backup
The NVRAM (Flash-ROM) installed on the MAIN board assembly stores various parameters for the system
operation.
The available backup parameters are as follows.
Panel setting parameters
Mechanism adjustment parameters
Main board-unique adjustment parameters
TIP
The MAIN board-unique adjustment parameters cannot be erased or modified.
If the MAIN board assembly is found to need replacement during maintenance operations, make sure to back
up the parameters. The backup data can be used to restore the original system status, omitting some
adjustment steps.
7.3.2
Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for parameter backup.
Windows PC:
CPU: Pentium 400MHz or higher, Installed memory: 128MB or more
With one of the following installed: Windows 98 SE / Windows Me / Windows 2000 / Windows XP
7-9
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
Equipped with network port (RJ-45) (10M/100M Ethernet interface)
Network crossover cable (For hub connection, network straight cable)
Dedicated network software (MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant) installation CD
7.3.3
Required Environment
Before starting work, set up the following environment.
(1) Installing Dedicated Network Software

1. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the PC, and open from "My Computer".
2. Drag and drop the "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" folder to the desktop to copy the files.
(2) Creating a Shortcut

To make it simpler to start the "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant", create a shortcut on the desktop.
1. Open the "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" folder on the desktop.
2. Right-click the "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer
Assistant.exe" in the folder, and select [Send
To]-[Desktop (create shortcut)]
3. A "Shortcut to MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" icon is created on the desktop.
(3) Confirming Startup of the "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant"

Once "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" is started, there is no need to exit it until a series of
processes completes.
1. Double-click the "Shortcut to MUTOH
Maintenance Engineer Assistant", and check that
the application starts correctly.
At the first startup, it will be started in Japanese
mode.
Rev.-01
7-10
7 Adjustment
(4) Printer IP Address Check

1. Start "Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant"
from the shortcut on the desk top.
2. Click [Setup(S)] in the main window.
3. Select [Option(O)] from the [Setup(S)] menu,

and check that the printer IP address matches.
The default printer IP address is
"192.168.1.253". After confirming, click [OK].
NOTE
For the IP address, use the default value where possible. If you wish to use a different IP address
than the default, consult the network administrator of the network.
When setting the IP address, even if the address is one or two digits, it is not necessary to enter
three digits by adding a "0". For example, when "10", entering "010" will not be recognized as
"10", and an error will occur during communication.
7-11
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(5) PC IP Address Setting

When setting up Windows XP when the printer IP address is set to default, follow the procedures below.
1. From the [Control Panel], open [Network Connections].
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and select [Properties].
3. Double-click [Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)].
4. In [IP address], input

any value of
"192.168.1.1" to
192.168.1.252" or
"192.168.1.254".
Any numerical value between 1 and 252,
or 254.
Rev.-01
7-12
7 Adjustment
5. Click [OK] to finish the setting.

CAUTION
When the printer and host PC are not connected directly with a cross cable, and they are
connected through a hub where other PCs are connected, the IP address of the host PC
and the device on the network may differ. When connecting through a hub with other PCs
connected, please consult the network administrator.
(6) Connecting Printer and PC

1. Connect the printer LAN port and PC LAN port
with a LAN cable.
Network port
NOTE
When connecting the printer and PC directly, use a "crossover cable". When connecting the printer
and PC through a hub, use a "straight cable".
Disconnect the printer from the network, and connect the host PC with a crossover cable whenever
possible.
7-13
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(7) Starting Board Manager Mode

1. When the printer is in the operation status or in
the diagnosis menu display status, turn the
[Power] key to OFF.
2. While holding down the [<] key on the operation
panel, press the [Power] key.
When the LCD displays [Board Manager Mode],
if the [<] key is released, the display turns to
[Waiting for command].
NOTE
If the [Waiting for command] is not displayed, follow the steps below.
If an IP address other than the default is displayed on the board, releasing the [<] key will display
[IP192.168.xxx.xxx?] (depending on the set address) on the LCD. In this case, display the default IP
(IP192.168.001.253?) or the set IP address using the [+] key or [-] key, and press the [Enter] key.
[Waiting for command] will then appear.
Rev.-01
7-14
7.3.4
7 Adjustment
Receiving Parameters
This section describes the procedures for recording backup parameters to the PC from the existing main board
assembly. To download backup parameters, follow the steps below.
NOTE
The extension of the parameter file is ".prm".
1. Click [Parameter Receive].
2. Click [OK] in the "Parameter Receive check"

window. Receive will start.
* Clicking [Cancel] will return to the main
window.
3. During receive of parameters, the

"Communication dialog" window will open.
* If during transfer, it is possible to stop the
transfer by clicking [Cancel].
4. Click [OK] in the "Receive completed" window.
7-15
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
5. In the "Save of receive parameter file" window,

confirm the location to save to, and then click
[Save].
* The backup parameter is saved.
NOTE
When the "Save of receive parameter file" window opens, the file name to save is automatically set
(can be changed). The file name automatically set is the printer serial number. If the printer does not
have a serial number, the default file name is set.
7.3.5
Firmware Installation
This section describes the procedure to install the firmware.

The NVRAM (Flash-ROM) on the MAIN board assembly stores the programs (firmware) that control the
machine operations.
When performing the following maintenance works, always install the firmware.
Replacing the MAIN board assembly
Updating the firmware

CAUTION
Be very careful of the firmware to transfer. If an improper firmware is installed, the printer
may become unable to operate. In this case, it will be necessary to replace the circuitboard.
(1) DIP Switch Settings on the Main Board

When the circuitboard is replaced, it is possible to change the firmware by unlocking the false installation
prevention safety by switching the DIP switches.
Perform operations according to the following procedures.
Rev.-01
7-16
7 Adjustment
CAUTION
After completing work, make sure to set the DIP switches on the circuitboard back to their
original positions. If left as is, the firmware false installation prevention safety will not
function. If an improper firmware is installed, the printer may become unable to operate. In
this case, it will be necessary to replace the circuitboard.
1. Replace the main board.

NOTE
Before changing the DIP switches on the main board, open the following cover:
Board BOX64:
2. Push DIP switch (SW3) 2 on the main board to the left (towards the origin), to turn ON.
No.
-5&

%
10
Part name
Main board
DIP switch
DIP switch 1
DIP switch 2
3. Start up the printer in board manager mode.

"(6) Connecting Printer and PC" p.7-13
7-17
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
4. Using the [setting/value +] key or the [setting/

value -] key on the operation panel, select the
default IP address "192.168.1.253", and press the
[Enter] key.
5. Follow the "(2) Firmware Transfer" p.7-18 of this section, and "(3) Confirming Completion of
Installation to Plotter" p.7-20 in this section to install the firmware.
6. Write the parameters according to "7.3.6 Sending Parameters" p.7-22 in this section.
NOTE
When backup parameters are not saved for some reason (the circuitboard was damaged and the
backup parameters could not be downloaded, etc.), after installing the newest firmware, perform
NVRAM initialization, and enter the parameters manually.
"6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2" p.6-3
"5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu" p.5-55
7. Turn OFF the main unit.

8. Push the DIP switch (SW3) 2 to the right (opposite the direction of the origin), to return to the OFF
position.
NOTE
10
%
-5&
After completing installation, push the DIP switch to the right (opposite the direction of the origin)
to turn OFF.
9. Close the board box 64.
(2) Firmware Transfer

The following explains the procedure to transfer firmware.
Follow the steps below.
Rev.-01
7-18
7 Adjustment
NOTE
When connecting the plotter and PC on a one-to-one basis, use "crossover cable". When connecting
the plotter and PC via hub, use "straight cable".
1. Click [Firmware Install].

The "Select of installation file" window is
displayed.
2. Select a file to be transferred from the folder

where the firmware is saved, and click [Open].
Select the install file to be transferred from the
folder where the firmware is stored, and click
[Open].
window.
3. In the "Firm installation check" window, click

[OK].
Installation will start.
window.
4. The "Communication dialog" window will open.
* If during transfer, it is possible to stop the
5. The "Communication dialog" window will open.
7-19
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
CAUTION
When the "Transfer completed" window is displayed, only the transfer of the installation
file from the "MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant" to the printer has completed, and
installation of the program to the printer is still incomplete. Make sure not to turn the
printer power OFF until the installation on the printer side has completed.
If "Transfer failed incompatible F/W" appears during installation even though the correct
firmware is being installed, refer to the following.
"(1) DIP Switch Settings on the Main Board" p.7-16
(3) Confirming Completion of Installation to Plotter

Program installation to plotter continues even after the "Transfer completed" window is closed. Check
whether the program is properly installed from the operation panel.
1. When firmware transfer starts, the LCD display
on the plotters operation control panel changes
to [Program receiving].
The Data LED flashes.
2. The LCD display changes as follows:

Erasing ( is numeric)
Copying ( is numeric)
Comparing ( is numeric)
Rev.-01
7-20
7 Adjustment
CAUTION
While the LCD display is in the Erasing to Comparing status, the [Power] key is disabled. In
this situation, never disconnect the plug of the plotter. Doing so may disable plotter startup,
which will require reinstallation with special jig.
3. If the LCD displays [transfer complete], the

buzzer sounds three times and only the Power
LED turns on among all LEDs.
4. When [ bytes recv ( is numeric)] is

displayed, installation completes.
Turn off the plotter and restart it. Then check the
version number displayed on the LCD.
NOTE
If an error occurs during installation, the buzzer sounds at intervals of 0.25 second, while the LCD
displays error message and all LEDs of Roll, Sheet, Color and Black & white flash. In this case,
follow the troubleshooting instructions. To stop the buzzer, press any key except for the [Power] key
once. Pressing the key once again will return the LCD display to waiting for command and only
the Power LED on.
7-21
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.3.6
Sending Parameters
NOTE
Before sending parameters, perform the following work.
Receiving parameters:
"7.3.4 Receiving Parameters" p.7-15
Firmware installation:
"7.3.5 Firmware Installation" p.7-16
TIP
The extension of the parameter file is .prm.
1. Click [Parameter Send] in the main window.
2. When the "Select of send parameter file" window

opens, select the parameter file to transfer and
click [Open].
window.
3. When the "Parameter Send check" window

opens, click [OK].
window.
Rev.-01
7-22
7 Adjustment
4. When sending completes and the "Send

completed" window opens, click [OK].
NOTE
Almost as soon as the "Send completed" window is displayed, writing to plotter also finishes. If
writing to plotter finishes successfully, the LCD displays the following:
Transfer complete
Buzzer sounds three times and only Power LED turns on. Then, when the LCD displays
16372 bytes recv
parameter writing completes.
7.3.7
Sub Controller Installation
This section describes installation procedures of HEATER_CONT board firmware.
TIP
The extension of the sub controller file is .mfl.
CAUTION
Be very careful of the firmware to transfer. If an improper firmware is installed, the printer
may become unable to operate. In this case, it will be necessary to replace the circuitboard.
1. Click [Sub Controller Install] in the main

window.
7-23
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
2. When the "Select of File to Install" window

opens, select the transfer target install file and
click [Open].
window.
3. When the "Sub Controller Install confirm"

window opens, click [OK] to start the transfer.
window.
4. During the transfer, the "Transferring" window

will open.
During the transfer, it is possible to cancel the
5. When the transfer completes and the "Send

completed" window opens, click [OK].
7.3.8
RTC Date & Time Setting
The year/month/date/time settings on the PC can be transferred to the RTC(Real Time Clock) on the main
board.
The time set can also be confirmed at "Time Check" in the self-diagnosis function.
"5.10 Time Check" p.5-51
NOTE
When transferring the time, the time set on the PC will be transferred as.
Make sure that the correct time is set on the PC before working.
Rev.-01
7-24
7 Adjustment
1. Click [Date & Time Install] in the main window.
2. When the "Date & time installation check"

window opens, click [OK].
Installing will start.
3. When installing completes and the "Install

completed" window opens, confirm that the
installed date is correct, and click [OK].
7-25
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.4 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the steel belt.
When you have removed and installed the steel belt, always adjust the steel belt tension.
7.4.1
Jigs and Tools
The jigs and tools required for steel belt tension adjustment are as follows.
Tension gauge: for measuring Max. 2N (204gf)
Adhesive material
TIP
Refer to"8.4 Jigs and Tools" p.8-5 for the details of jigs and tools required for this work.
7.4.2
Adjustment Procedure
To adjust the steel belt tension, follow the steps below.

3. Press the tension gauge at the center position of the steel belt.
1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Steel belt
Tension gauge
Y tension attachment
7-26
7 Adjustment
TIP
The steel belt tension specification is 0.98N 0.09N (100gf 10gf).
The range where the steel belt moves up and down in the pulley is 1 mm or less.
4. If the tension of the steel belt does not agree to the specification, adjust the tension with a steel belt tension
screw.
1
No.
Part name
Steel belt
Steel belt tension screw
CAUTION
Adjust the steel belt so that the steel belt is equally balanced. If not, the steel belt may be cut.
7-27
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment

1
No.
1
Part name
Adhesive material applying surface
6. Close all the covers.
Rev.-01
7-28
7 Adjustment
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the PF encoder assembly.
After replacing the PF encoder, adjust the PF encoder position.
7.5.1
To adjust PF encoder, follow the steps below.

2. Loosen the screws that retain PF encoder.
3. Align the PF encoder assembly so that the corner covers the periphery of the PF encoder scale, then retain
the PF encoder assembly with screws.
NOTE
Align the PF encoder so that the encoder scale slit periphery came very close to the corners of the PF
encoder.
PF encorder scale
come very close to
this point.
PF encorder scale
PF encorder
4. Attach the slit guide to the PF encoder assembly.

No.
7-29
Part name
Slit guide
Scale
PF scale assembly
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
5. Turn the scale around to check that the scale does not swing toward the speed reduction pulley from the
center of the encoder gap. If it swings, adjust the PF encoder assembly position again.
NOTE
There is no problem even if the scale hits the slit guide when turned around.
6. Close the side maintenance cover L.
Rev.-01
7-30
7 Adjustment
7.6 CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the CR speed reduction belt.
When you have removed and installed the CR speed reduction belt, adjust the CR speed reduction belt
tension.
7.6.1
Jigs and Tools
The jigs and tools required for CR speed reduction belt tension adjustment are as follows.
Tension gauge: for measuring Max. 40N (4080gf)

7.6.2
Adjustment Procedures

3. Remove the panel to conversion board tape wire from the flat cramps (2 pieces) on the back of the
cartridge cover stay R.
4
No.
Part name
CR motor assembly
Cartridge cover stay R
Panel to conversion board tape wire
Flat cramp
7-31
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
4. Remove the screws (3 pieces) that retain cartridge cover stay R.

Upper
No.
Lower
Part name
CR motor assembly
Screws that retain cartridge cover stay R

(pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer
M4 8)
5. Remove the cartridge cover stay R.

6. Loosen the hexagon bolts (4 pieces) that retain CR motor mounting plate.
1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
CR motor assembly
Screws that retain cartridge cover stay R

(pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer
M4 8)
7-32
7 Adjustment
7. Mount a tension gauge to CR motor mounting plate.

3
Enlarged view
No.
Part name
Tension gauge
CR motor mounting plate
CR motor assembly
8. Pull the tension gauge in a direction perpendicular to the CR motor assembly so that the tension of the
CR speed reduction belt equals the specification.
TIP
The tension specification of the CR speed reduction belt is 34.32N 3.43N (3,500gf 350gf).
9. Tighten the hexagon bolts (4 pieces) that retain the CR motor mounting plate.
10. Continue adjusting until the tension of the CR speed reduction belt equals the specification.
11. Remove the tension gauge from the CR motor mounting plate.
7-33
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.7 Head Accuracy Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant.
When you have removed and installed the head assembly, such as head assembly replacement, always adjust
the head slant following the steps below.
7.7.1
Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)
This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in horizontal direction.
When you have removed and installed the head assembly, such as for head assembly replacement, always
adjust the head slant and depth following the steps below.
NOTE
Before starting adjustment, remove the following parts.
CR board cover:
Adjust the horizontal height of the head alignment before adjusting the vertical alignment slant of
head alignment.
In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
Lateral view
1. Start the plotter in the self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment patterns in "Head Slant:
Slant 1".
"5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-28
Rev.-01
7-34
7 Adjustment
2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
A
20mm
A: Check the slant at this point.

C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
3. Move the head adjusting cam lever to adjust head slant.
No.
Part name
Head adjusting cam
Head mounting plate
7-35
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.7.2
Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)
This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in vertical direction.
After operation such as head assembly replacement, adjust the head slant according to the steps below.
NOTE
Before starting adjustment, remove the following parts.
CR board cover:
"4.8.3 Replacing CR Board Assembly" p.4-106
Before aligning print head in vertical direction, perform the alignment in horizontal direction.
"7.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-34
In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
Lateral view
1. Start the plotter in the self-diagnosis function mode and select "Head Slant: Slant 2".
"5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-28
Rev.-01
7-36
7 Adjustment
2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
4-A
4-B
3-B
3-A
2-B
2-A
1-A
1-B
CCW
4-A
4-B
3-B
3-A
2-B
2-A
1-A
1-B
CW
A: Check the vertical slant angle at this point.

C: OK
D: Move the head base mounting plate downward.
E: Move the head base mounting plate upward.
7-37
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
3. Loosen the head base mounting plate screw and move the head base mounting plate up and down (in the
direction shown below) to adjust the head vertical angle.
No.
Part name
Head base mounting plate
Head base mounting plate screw
7.8 PG Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the carriage height (distance between carriage and platen).
7.8.1
Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for carriage height adjustment.
PG height check jig
TIP
7.8.2
To make adjustment, follow the steps below.

2. Unlock the head lock.
Rev.-01
7-38
7 Adjustment
3. Place the PG height check jig on the platen.
NOTE
Place the PG height check jig where print heads pass over the jig when moving the carriage.
No.
1
Part name
PG height check jig
4. Move the carriage from the origin side with the lever LOW.
5. Check if the carriage passes over the 1.37 mm part of the PG height check jig, but not over the 1.42 mm
part.
2
Enlarged view
1.42mm
1.37mm
No.
Part name
PG height check jig
Print head
Platen
6. Reverse the jig and move the carriage from the opposite side of the jig.
7-39
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7. If the carriage passes over the 1.42 mm part of the PG height check jig, loosen the screws (1 piece on each
side) on the left and right side of the carriage that retain the head UD collar to lower the PG.
Left view
No.
Right view
Part name
Head UD collar
Screws that retain the head UD collar (pan-head

screw with spring washer and flat washer M3 8)
Carriage
8. Loosen ths screws (1 piece on each side) that retain the head UD collar to fix the height of the head.
9. Move the carriage back to the origin.
7.9 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the P_EDGE sensor sensitivity.
When you have removed and installed the P_EDGE sensor, the P_REAR sensor, or the MAIN board
assembly, adjust the P_EDGE sensor sensitivity.
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
Rev.-01
7-40
7 Adjustment
NOTE
When you adjust the sensor sensitivity, note the followings:
Perform work in a location where external light from sunlight and other lighting will not affect
the sensor.
During media adjustment, lower the lever so that the media is in contact. If the media is not
securely held, the sensor detection accuracy may be adversely affected.
When operating the volume on the main board assembly, use a non-conductive screwdriver.
If a conductive screwdriver touches electronic parts on the main board or metal components
such as the frame, there will be a possibility that a short circuit will occur.
7.9.1
Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for P_EDGE sensor sensitivity adjustment.
Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
7.9.2
To adjust the P_EDGE sensor, follow the steps below.
TIP
The adjustment parameters are as follows;
HIGH level (with media): 216 to 226
LOW level (without media): 0 to 80

NOTE
Start the self-diagnosis function before setting the test media. Otherwise, the suction fan does not
rotate and you cannot get correct setting value.
2. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode.

"5.2.2 Starting Up" p.5-4
7-41
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
3. Select "Check 2: Test" from the self-diagnosis menu.

4. After confirming that the Check 2: Test is displayed in the operation panel, set the test media on the
media base position and down the media hold lever to confirm that the suction fan starts rotating.
NOTE
The suction fan will not rotate if the [Enter] key is pressed before setting the test media. Make sure
to press the [Enter] key after setting the test media.
5. Select "Test 4: Sensor" from the inspection menu.

6. Select "Sen 8: EdgeAD ??" from the sensor menu.
7. Move the carriage to the center of the test media.
8. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes between 216 and 226.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
Trimmer R361: Rough adjustment
Trimmer R365: Fine adjustment
Enlarged view
No.
Part name
Trimmer R361
Trimmer R365
9. Move the carriage and adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes so that the value displayed in the
operation panel becomes between 216 and 226.
Rev.-01
7-42
7 Adjustment
10. Move the carriage so that the P_EDGE sensor is moved from the media setting position to the nonreflective tape area.
1
No.
Part name
Platen
Non-reflective tape
11. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is "80" or less.
12. Move the carriage back to the origin.
7.10 P_REAR Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

This section describes the procedure for adjusting sensor sensitivity.
When the replacement of the following sensors or the main board assembly is performed, perform adjustment
of the P_REAR sensor.
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
NOTE
When you adjust the sensor sensitivity, note the followings:
Perform work in a location where external light from sunlight and other lighting will not affect
the sensor.
During media adjustment, lower the lever so that the media is in contact. If the media is not
securely held, the sensor detection accuracy may be adversely affected.
When operating the volume on the main board assembly, use a non-conductive screwdriver.
If a conductive screwdriver touches electronic parts on the main board or metal components
such as the frame, there will be a possibility that a short circuit will occur.
7-43
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.10.1 Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for P_REAR sensor sensitivity adjustment.
Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
7.10.2 Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the P_REAR sensor, follow the steps below.
TIP
The adjustment parameters are as follows;
HIGH level (with media): 216 to 226
LOW level (without media): 0 to 80

NOTE
Start the self-diagnosis function before setting the test media. Otherwise, the suction fan does not
rotate and you cannot get correct setting value.
2. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode.

3. Select "Check 2: Test" from the self-diagnosis menu.
4. After confirming that the Check 2: Test is displayed in the operation panel, set the test media on the
media base position and down the media hold lever to confirm that the suction fan starts rotating.
NOTE
The suction fan will not rotate if the [Enter] key is pressed before setting the test media. Make sure
to press the [Enter] key after setting the test media.
5. Select "Test 4: Sensor" from the inspection menu.

6. Select "Sen 8: EdgeAD ??" from the sensor menu.
Rev.-01
7-44
7 Adjustment
7. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes between 216 and 226.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
Trimmer R371: Rough adjustment
Trimmer R373: Fine adjustment
MAIN board assembly

1
2
No.
Part name
Trimmer R371
Trimmer R373
8. Move the carriage and adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes so that the value displayed in the
operation panel becomes between 216 and 226.
9. Move the carriage so that the P_EDGE sensor is moved from the media setting position to the nonreflective tape area.
10. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is "80" or less.
7-45
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
Rev.-01
7-46
8 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
8.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 8- 2
8.2
Periodical Services ................................................................................. 8- 3

8.2.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .......................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement .............................. 8-3
8.3
Part Life Information............................................................................... 8- 4
8.4
Jigs and Tools......................................................................................... 8- 5

8.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................... 8-5
8.5
Lubrication/Bonding............................................................................... 8- 6
8.6
Transportation of Plotter...................................................................... 8- 10
8-1
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information about the periodical services, part life, lubrication/bonding, and transport.
WARNING
Before starting any maintenance work, always perform the following operations.
Turn the printer power OFF.
Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
CAUTION
Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance
work.
When servicing the machinery inside with some covers removed, pay special attention
not to be injured by the driving mechanisms.
Maintenance must be done by two or more persons for the following work.
When disassembling or reassembling the printer and the dedicated stand
When packing the printer for transportation
Rev.-01
8-2
8 Maintenance
8.2 Periodical Services

This section describes the periodical services required for this printer.
The periodical services ensures stable plotting quality of the printer.
Perform periodical inspections according to Table 8-2"Periodical Inspection Part List"(p.3) and perform
cleaning and part replacement as necessary.
TIP
Operation manual
Separate sheet Exploded view P.2-P.10
8.2.1
Periodic Replacement Parts
The parts in the following table require replacement once per year.
Table 8-1 Replacement Target Parts

Maintenance part names
(Maintenance part numbers)
VJ periodic maintenance kit (DG40075)
8.2.2
Replacement parts
Replacement procedure
Damper assembly
"4.6.1 Replacing PF Speed

Reduction Belt" p.4-60
Maintenance assembly
"4.9 Replacing Maintenance

Section" p.4-120
Cleaner head assembly
"4.7.3 Replacing CR Drive

Pulley Assembly" p.4-89
Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement

Table 8-2 Periodical Inspection Part List
Part
Media guide F
Platen front surface
Timing fence
(CR encoder detection
slit plate)
Timing
Several times per
year
Several times per

year
Check point
Action
Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Damages
Clean it.
Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Damages
Clean it.
8-3
If ink deposits are

present, remove them
with a dampened cloth
and wipe the area with a
clean dry cloth.
If any damages are found,

replace the part.
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
Table 8-2 Periodical Inspection Part List(Continued)

Part
Timing
Check point
Action
P_REAR sensor front

surface
Several times per

year
Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Clean it.
Cleaner head
(Cleaning wiper)
Several times per

year
Ink deposits
Damages
Clean it.
Pressure roller
Several times per

year
Ink deposits
Damages
Clean it.
8.3 Part Life Information

This section shows how to check the life of the service parts.
To know the life of the service parts, check the maintenance counter from the counter display menu in the
maintenance mode.
TIP
"6.3.1 Counter Display Menu" p.6-4
Part life information of this printer is shown in the table below.
Table 8-3 List of Parts Life Expectancy

Part
Life expectancy
Warning
display
How to
restore
Replacement
parts
References
Waste fluid tank Not counted

Waste fluid
internally. Detected box full
at the float sensor
and a message is
displayed.
Waste ink BOX (Replaced by

user)
CR motor
Counter
clear
At the first
warning:
CR motor
CR Driven
pulley
(Check the ink
tube and the CR
cable.)
At the next
warning:
CR cable
besides above
Rev.-01
4,600,000 passes
Check Life
[CR motor]
8-4
"4.7.2
Replacing CR
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-87
"4.7.6
Replacing CR
Driven
Pulley" p.4-96
"4.7.10
Replacing Ink
Tube" p.4-102
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC" p.499
8 Maintenance
Table 8-3 List of Parts Life Expectancy (Continued)

Part
Life expectancy
Warning
display
How to
restore
Replacement
parts
References
PF motor
Counted only, not

displayed
Check Life
[PF motor]
Counter
clear
Replace as
necessary
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
Print head
Counted only, not

displayed
Check Life
[Head]
Counter
clear
Replace as
necessary
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
Pump
182,000 times
Check Life
[Pump]
Counter
clear
Replace as
necessary
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
8.4 Jigs and Tools

This section provides lists of jigs and tools required for service operations.
8.4.1
Required Tools
(1) Tools for Part Replacement

Table 8-4 Tools for Part Replacement
No.
Name
Part number
Remarks
Phillips driver No.2
Generic product
More than 250 mm shaft length is

recommended.
Generic product
Less than 50 mm shaft length is

recommended.
Generic product
Flat-head driver
Generic product
For replacing E rings
Box driver
Generic product
For replacing CR board assemblies
Ratchet
Generic product
Long-nose pliers
Generic product
Tweezers
Generic product
Hex wrench (opposite side: 1.5

to 6 mm)
Generic product
10
E ring holder (E-2.5)
Generic product
8-5
Name: JIS E-2.5

Manufacturer: Iwata Denko Co., Ltd
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
Table 8-4 Tools for Part Replacement(Continued)

No.
Name
Part number
11
E ring holder (E-5)
Generic product
12
Penlight
Generic product
13
C ring pliers
Generic product
Remarks
Name: JIS E-5

Manufacturer: Iwata Denko Co., Ltd
For replacing take-up flange assemblies
(2) Tools for Adjustment

Table 8-5 Tools for Adjustment
No.
Name
Part number
Remarks
Personal computer
Generic product
Printer port mounted
Crossover cable
Generic product
For installing firmware
Tension gauge
Generic product
Max. 4,080gf (40N) for measurement

Manufacturer: Ohba Keiki Seisakusho Co.,
Ltd.
Tension gauge
Generic product
Max. 204gf (2N) for measurement

Manufacturer: Ohba Keiki Seisakusho Co.,
Ltd.
Straight scale (100 mm)
Generic product
MF-3G
Exclusive use media For P_EDGE sensor, for print accuracy

adjustment
PG height check tool (64)
JD-42796
8.5 Lubrication/Bonding
This section covers the lubrication/bonding information.
After disassembling/assembling this plotter, always perform necessary lubrication/bonding according to
"Table 8-6 Lubricant List" p.8-7.
CAUTION
Only use specified lubricants and greases. The use of unauthorized lubricants and greases
may damage the components and shorten the plotter life.
Rev.-01
8-6
8 Maintenance
Table 8-6 Lubricant List

Parts
PF drive section
CR drive
section
Cursor section
Item
Manufacturer
Type
Up/down gear
on pressure
lever
Apply to gear
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
PF motor
bracket /
Middle gear
inner diameter
Apply to middle
gear inner diameter
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Speed
reduction
pulley
Apply to drive
pulley
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Medium tray
slide, Grit
medium tray
Apply to the areas

the plates contact
each other.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Y rail
machining
diagram
Apply to the hole

securing Y drive
base.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Apply to the hole

securing the return
pulley bracket.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Y rail and
roller guide
While inserting
roller guide, apply
to the downside of
the roller guide.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Pressure shaft
bearing
Apply to the upside

and the shaft
insertion part.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Pressure cam
Apply to cam part.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Roller guide
Apply to the front

surface of roller
guide.
Mitsubishi
Super multi-dia
tetrat No.32
Drive pulley
Apply to drive
pulley.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Head U/D
collar
Apply to head U/D

collar.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Head U/D cam
Apply to head U/D

cam.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Slide gear
Apply to gear.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
8-7
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
Table 8-6 Lubricant List (Continued)

Parts
Head base
section
Rev.-01
Item
Manufacturer
Type
Head bracket
Apply to the
position of the
screw hole securing
shoulder screw.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Head slide
base
Apply to the part

contacting with the
CR cursor.
Kanto Kasei Co.,

Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
8-8
8 Maintenance
Table 8-7 Adhesive List

Parts
Item
Manufacturer
Type
PF drive section
Set screw
Apply screwlocking agent to

the coupling set
screw.
Three Bond Co.,

Ltd.
1401
CR drive section
CR driven
pulley
adjusting
screw
After adjusting
steel belt, apply
screw-locking
agent.
Three Bond Co.,

Ltd.
1401
Others
Screw
Apply to the area

screw-locking
agent is applied.
Three Bond Co.,

Ltd.
1401
Table 8-8 Tape List

Parts
Others
The areas
sharpened edge
is likely to
emerge
Item
Attach acetate
tapes to the tape
wires or harnesses
where sharpened
edge is likely to
emerge.
8-9
Manufacturer
Type
Not specified
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
8.6 Transportation of Plotter

This section describes how to transport the plotter.
Before transporting the plotter, you must package it in the same manner as it was delivered using protective
materials and packaging materials so that the plotter will not be subject to excessive impact and vibrations
during the transportation.
Follow the steps below to package the plotter.
(1) Task Before Transportation

1. Start the Self-Diagnosis Mode.
2. Start the Head Cleaning Menu 2.
3. Discharge ink of all heads.
4. Remove all ink cartridges.
5. Install the cleaning jigs.
6. Fill shipping liquid.
7. Remove the cleaning jigs.
8. Turn the plotter power off.
9. Remove all cables including the power cable.
10. Treat the waste fluid.
11. Fit the plotter with protective materials.
12. Package the plotter.
TIP
Operation manual
(2) Task After Transportation

1. Unpack, assemble, and install the plotter.
2. Make the plotter ready for operation.
Rev.-01
8-10
9 Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
9.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 9- 2
9.2
Troubleshooting with Error Messages ................................................. 9- 2

9.2.1 Operation Status ............................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message ...................................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot .............................................................. 9-11
9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission................................... 9-26
9.3
Troubleshooting Without Error Messages ......................................... 9- 30

9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems............................................................ 9-30
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems.................................................................. 9-40
9.3.3 Printing Problems......................................................................... 9-42
9.3.4 Noise Problems............................................................................ 9-61
9.3.5 Online Function Problems............................................................ 9-64
9.3.6 Other Problems............................................................................ 9-66
9.3.7 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software ......................... 9-68
9-1
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on possible causes of machine errors/damage and recovery actions.
If the machine is malfunctioning and an error message is displayed on the operation panel, refer to "9.2
Troubleshooting with Error Messages" p.9-2. If the machine is malfunctioning but no error messages are
displayed, refer to "9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages" p.9-30.
If cause of errors/damage and recovery actions are not found in this chapter, or the machine cannot restore to
normal status, please contact the distributor your purchased the product from or our customer support center.
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages

This section describes the messages displayed in normal operation and upon an error occurrence as well as
how to correct the error.
The available messages are as follows.
Table 9-1 Error Message Type

Priority
Message type
Contents
Reference
Operation status
Displayed when the machine is operating normally.
"9.2.1
Operation
Status" p.9-3
Error with
message
Displayed when an abnormal condition occurs

during normal operation.
"9.2.2
Errors with
Message" p.9-5
Error requiring
reboot
Displayed when a serious error critical to the

machine operation occurs.
"9.2.3
Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-11
Rev.-01
9-2
9.2.1
9 Troubleshooting
Operation Status
This section describes the message contents, check items, and recovery actions for normal operation.
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Cover open
Front cover is
open.
1. Is cover sensor
assembly loose?
Set media
Media holding 1. Are front cover R

lever is turned
sensor assembly
backward.
cable and front
cover L sensor
assembly cable
connected securely?
Action
Reference
Tighten cover sensor

assembly screws.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Front Cover
Sensor" p.432
Correctly connect front

cover R sensor
assembly cable to
MAIN board assembly
connector J38, and front
cover L sensor assembly
cable MAIN board
assembly connector J40.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
2. Does pressure lever Lubricate pressure cam.

"8.5
move smoothly?
Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-6
3. Is lever sensor
assembly fitted
correctly?
Adjust lever sensor

assembly position.
4. Is sensor of lever
sensor assembly
contaminated?
Clean sensor face using

"4.6.6
a swab.
Replacing
Lever Up
Sensor" p.467
5.
Correctly connect lever

"4.6.6
sensor assembly cable Replacing
to MAIN board
Lever Up
assembly connector J30. Sensor" p.467
Is lever sensor
cable connected
securely?
"4.6.6
Replacing
Lever Up
Sensor" p.467
6. Panel unit assembly Replace panel unit

may be damaged.
assembly.
"4.3.1
Replacing
Panel Unit"
p.4-30
7. Panel cable may be Replace panel cable.

damaged.
"4.3.1
Replacing
Panel Unit"
p.4-30
9-3
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages(Continued)
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
No media
Displayed in
the following
cases:
When
media is
not set
Check item
Action
8. Check cover sensor Replace cover sensor

assembly operation assembly.
from "Sen 5: Cover"
of self-diagnosis
function.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Front Cover
Sensor" p.432
9. Check lever sensor Replace lever sensor

operation from "Sen assembly.
7: Lever" of selfdiagnosis function.
"4.6.6
Replacing
Lever Up
Sensor" p.467
10. Main board

assembly may be
damaged.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
1.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
Is P_EDGE sensor Securely connect it to

assembly cable at
CR board assembly
the head section
connector J208.
connected
correctly?
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
2. Is P_REAR sensor
assembly under
media guide R
connected
correctly?
Securely connect it to
MAIN board assembly
connector J42.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
3. Check sensor
sensitivity from
"Sen 8:EdgeAD" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Adjust with MAIN

board assembly volume
(R361, R365).
Replace P_EDGE
sensor assembly.
"7.9
P_EDGE
Sensor
Sensitivity
Adjustment"
p.7-40
4. CR board assembly Replace CR board

may be damaged.
assembly.
Rev.-01
Reference
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
5. Check presence of
media from "Sen 9:
RearAD" of selfdiagnosis function.
When "No media" is

"4.6.5
displayed even if media Replacing
is set, replace P_REAR P_REAR
sensor assembly.
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-65
6. CR cable may be
broken.
Replace CR cable.
9-4
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC"
p.4-99
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages(Continued)
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
9.2.2
Check item
7. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
Action
Replace MAIN board
assembly.
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Errors with Message
This section describes the contents of errors with messages as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These messages are displayed when an abnormal condition occurs while the machine is running.
Upon an occurrence of an error with message, the machine stops its operation at the same time.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes. After that, the machine will restart its operation.
Table 9-3 Symptoms and Check Items for Errors with Message
No.
1
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Media
Media
1. Is P_EDGE sensor
detection error detection failed
assembly cable at
head connected
correctly?
2. Is P_REAR sensor
under media guide
R connected
correctly?
Action
CR board assembly
connector J208.
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
MAIN board assembly
connector J42.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
3. Check sensor
sensitivity from
"Sen 8:EdgeAD" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Adjust with MAIN

board assembly
volume (R361,
R365).
Replace P_EDGE
sensor assembly.
4. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect following

obliquely?
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J9 - J11
CR board: J201 J205
5. CR cable assembly Replace CR cable

may be broken.
assembly.
9-5
Reference
"7.9
P_EDGE
Sensor
Sensitivity
Adjustment"
p.7-40
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC"
p.4-99
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-3 Symptoms and Check Items for Errors with Message(Continued)
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Action
6. CR board assembly Replace CR board

may be damaged.
assembly.
Check item
Media skew
error
Media is
running
obliquely.
Reference
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
media from "Sen
7:RearAD" of selfdiagnosis function.
When "No media" is

"4.6.5
displayed even if media Replacing
is set, replace P_REAR P_REAR
sensor.
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-65
8. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
1. Set media again and If this error is caused by check reappearance. user's inappropriate
media setting, instruct
correct media setting
procedure.
2. Is suction fan
judged as normal
when checked
through "Test 6:
Fan" - "Fan 1:
Suction fan" of selfdiagnosis function?
- Check connection of
"4.6.8
following MAIN board Replacing
assembly connectors.
Suction Fan"
Suction fan 1 cable: p.4-76
J25
Suction fan 2 cable:
J26
J28
J29
Replace suction fan

assembly.
Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate
normally.
3. Is shielding material Remount it at specified secured at specified position.

position?
4. Check pressure
lever operation.
Rev.-01
9-6
Apply grease (G501) to

"8.5
pressure cam and make Lubrication/
adjustment.
Bonding"
p.8-6
9 Troubleshooting
No.
3
Message
[C]
Ink Near End
[KCMY]
Ink End
Event/
symptom
Check item
Ink is running 1. Check which

short. Printing
cartridge has no ink
is possible.
from "Ctrl2:
Ink has run out.
Sensor" -> "Sen.3:
Any printing
etc" -> "12: Ink
operation stops
END" of selfimmediately.
diagnosis function.
Action
Reference
Remove all cartridges

"5.5.4
and lightly push the
Sensor
black resin lever of ink Menu" p.5-15
sensor assembly (K, C,
M, Y) to check that the
display of "[KCYM]
INK END" changes.
2. Check contact of the Reconnect following

ink sensor
connectors.
assembly.
MAIN board: J43
HEATER JUNCTION
board:
Connector J5(K)
Connector J6(C)
Connector J7(M)
Connector J8(Y)
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
3. For the ink color
that is displayed as
"Ink Near End" or
"Ink End", switch
ink sensor assembly
connector with that
of normally
displayed ink color.
If ink color display

changes after
replacing
connector:
Ink sensor assembly
is damaged.
Replace ink sensor
assembly.
"4.10.3
Replacing
Ink Cartridge
Control
Cable" p.4136
If ink color display

does not change
after replacing
connector:
Main board
assembly may be
damaged. Replace
MAIN board
assembly.
9-7
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
4
Message
[KCMY]
No Cartridge
Rev.-01
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
Cartridge is not 1. Turn machine OFF. If message appears:

installed.
Turn it ON again
Refer to action in check
and check if the
item No. 2.
same message
appears.
ink cartridge from
"Ctrl 2:Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" ->
"11:Ink NOT" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Remove all cartridges

and lightly push the
switch of ink NOT
sensor assembly (K, C,
M, Y) with something
with a flat tip such as
ballpoint pen to check
that the display of
"[KCYM] INK NOT"
changes.
"5.5.4
Sensor
Menu" p.5-15
3. Check contact of
ink NOT sensor
assembly
connector.
Reconnect following
connectors.
MAIN board: J43
HEATER JUNCTION
board:
Connector J5(K)
Connector J6(C)
Connector J7(M)
Connector J8(Y)
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
4. For the ink color

that is displayed as
"Ink Near End" or
"Ink End", switch
ink NOT sensor
assembly connector
with that of
normally displayed
ink color.
If ink color displayed as

"Ink End" changes after
replacing connector:
Ink sensor assembly is
damaged. Replace ink
sensor assembly.
"4.10.3
Replacing
Ink Cartridge
Control
Cable" p.4136
If ink color displayed as

"Ink End" does not
change after replacing
connector:
Main board assembly
may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board
assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9-8
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
[KCMY] Insert Specified ink 1. Check if the same If the message appears: specified
cartridge is not
message appear if Refer to the action in
cartridge
installed.
turning machine
check item No. 2.
OFF and turn it ON
again.
2. Check if specified
ink cartridge is
used.
Replace ink cartridge

with specified one.
Operation
Manual
3. Check if ink
cartridge status
detection operates
normally from "Ctrl
2: Sensor" ->
"Sen.3:etc" -> "710:[KCMY] Ink
ID" of selfdiagnosis function.
If detection does not

operate normally,
replace following parts.
Ink sensor assembly
Main board
assembly
Ink ID sensor
assembly
"4.10.3
Replacing
Ink Cartridge
Control
Cable" p.4136
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
4. Check contact of
ink ID sensor
assembly
connector.
Reconnect following
MAIN board assembly
connectors.
MAIN board: J43
HEATER JUNCTION
board:
Connector J5(K)
Connector J6(C)
Connector J7(M)
Connector J8(Y)
If no change occurs,
proceed to step (5).
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9-9
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
5. For cartridge that is

displayed as NG in
"Ctrl 2: Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" -> "710:[KCMY] Ink
ID" of selfdiagnosis function,
replace ink ID
sensor assembly
connector with that
of normally
displayed cartridge.
Reference
If cartridge
displayed as NG
changes:
Ink ID sensor
assembly displayed
as NG is damaged.
Replace defective
ink ID sensor
assembly.
"4.10.3
Replacing
Ink Cartridge
Control
Cable" p.4136
If cartridge
displayed as NG
does not change, or
all units are
displayed as NG:
Main board
assembly may be
damaged. Replace
MAIN board
assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Check Life
[Head]
The part life of Check the condition of

the head is
the head.
almost
expended.
Replace the head as

necessary. Clear the
counter after
replacement.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"6.3.2
Counter
Initialization
Menu" p.6-6
Check Life
[Pump]

the pump is
the pump.
almost
expended.
Replace the pump as

counter after
replacement.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
"6.3.2
Counter
Initialization
Menu" p.6-6
Check Life
[CR Motor]

the CR motor is the CR motor.
almost
expended.
Replace the CR motor

as necessary. Clear the
counter after
replacement.
"4.7.2
Replacing CR
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-87
"6.3.2
Counter
Initialization
Menu" p.6-6
Rev.-01
9-10
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Check Life [PF The part life of Check the condition of

Motor]
the PF motor is the PF motor.
almost
expended.
Action
Reference
Replace the PF motor as

"4.6.2
Replacing PF
counter after
Motor
replacement.
Assembly"
p.4-61
"6.3.2
Counter
Initialization
Menu" p.6-6
NOTE
The square bracket pair in an error message contains the applicable ink color.
If no ink and no cartridge occur at the same time, no cartridge message has priority to be displayed.
9.2.3
Errors Requiring Reboot
This section describes the contents of reboot-requiring errors as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These errors are issued when any of the following critical problems occurs.
Obstacle that prevents the machine's operation
Damage of electric circuits (boards, motors, sensors)
Abnormal operation of control programs
When any of the above conditions occurs, the machine follows the steps shown below before stopping its
operation.
1. Turn OFF the driving system power automatically.
2. Flash all lamps in the operation panel and generate intermittent audible alarm.
3. Display the applicable error message on the LCD.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes and restarting the machine.
9-11
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
(1) CPU system serious error

Table 9-4 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors
No.
1
Message
E 016 error
Interrupt
[00]
E 016 error
TLB Modif
[01]
Rev.-01
Event/
symptom
Interruption
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
interruption
process.
Check item
1. Check AC power
supply and printer
surrounding
equipment.
2. Check reappearance
by turning ON/OFF
the machine power
Command
several times. Make
border
sure to perform this
exception/TLB
check repeatedly
exception (load
even if no problems
or command
seem to be present.
fetch) error:
(Make the same
Abnormal
condition as user's.)
condition in
command
border.
Or TLB
exception in
data load or
command
fetch.
9-12
Action
Contact our customer
support center.
Reference
Operation
Manual
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-4 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors (Continued)
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
E 016 error
TLB-L/I
[02]
Data border
3. Check serial
exception/TLB
number of the
exception error
printer.
Contact our
customer support
center.
E 016 error
TLB-S
[03]
Data border
4. Main board
exception/TLB
assembly may be
exception
defective.
(store) error:
Abnormal
condition in
data border.
Or TLB
exception in
data storing.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
E 016 error
AddErr-L/I
[04]
Address
exception error
(load or
command
fetch):
Address error
in command
load or fetch.
E 016 error
AddErr-S
[05]
Address
exception error
(store):
Address error
in saving
process.
E 016 error
BusErr-I
[06]
Pass exception 5. Check serial

error
number of the
(command
printer.
fetch):
6. Main board
Address error
assembly may be
in command
defective.
loading or
storing
Contact our
customer support
center.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
9-13
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
8
Message
E 016 error
BusErr-L
[07]
Event/
symptom
Bus exception
error (load or
store):
Bus error in
command
loading or
storing
E 016 error
SystemCall
[08]
System call
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
system call
10
E 016 error
BreakPoint
[09]
Break point
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
break point
11
E 016 error
Reserved
[10]
Reserved
command
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
reserved
command
12
E 016 error
Copro
[11]
Coprocessor
disabled
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
coprocessor
Rev.-01
Check item
1. Check serial
number of the
printer.
2. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
9-14
Action
Contact our
customer support
center.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9 Troubleshooting
No.
13
Message
E 016 error
Overflow
[12]
14
E 016 error
Trap
[13]
15
E 016 error
Floating
[15]
16
17
E 016 error
Watchdog
[32]
E 016 error
Abort Err
[33]
Event/
symptom
Arithmetic
overflow
exception
error:
Overflow
occurs
Check item
1. Check AC power
supply and printer
surrounding
equipment.
Action
2. Check reappearance
by turning ON/OFF
Trap exception
the machine power
error:
several times. Make
Trap occurs
sure to perform this
check repeatedly
Floating point
even if no problems
exception
seem to be present.
error:
(Make the same
Abnormal
condition as user's.)
condition in
floating point 3. Check serial
process
number of the
printer.
Watchdog
time-out
4. Main board
exception
assembly may be
error:
defective.
Time-out in
watchdog
Contact our
customer support
center.
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Contact our
customer support
center.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
Abort error:
Process
aborted
NOTE
For the PC settings, refer to your PC's operation manual.
9-15
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
(2) Mechanical Serious Errors

Table 9-5 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors
No.
1
Message
E 065 error
PF motor
Event/
symptom
Check item
Abnormal
1. Check error history
condition in PF
from "Test 7:
motor (X-axis)
Record" of selfduring printer
diagnosis function.
operation.
2. Set the number of
Displayed if
endurance running
the difference
cycles to 50 or more
between motor
from "Life 2: PF
command
Motor" of selfvalue and
diagnosis function,
feedback from
and check if "X
encoder is
motor error" occurs.
large.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Check 2:
Test" -> "Test 5:
Encoder" of selfdiagnosis function.
4. Check if Main
Power Board
normally supplies
DC24V.
Action
-
Rev.-01
9-16
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Check connection of
following MAIN board
PF motor cable
assembly
connector: J20
PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
If NG, check
connection of
MAIN board
assembly
connector: J12.
5. PF motor assembly
may be defective.
6. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
Reference
Replace PF motor
assembly.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-5 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors (Continued)
No.
2
Message
E 067 error
PF encoder
Event/
symptom
Check item
Abnormal
condition in
from "Test 7:
media feed
Record" of selfamount (Xdiagnosis function.
axis) during
printer
endurance running
operation.
Displayed if
from "Life 2:PF
there is no
Motor" of selffeedback from
diagnosis function,
encoder.
and check if "X
Action
-
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
Check connection of
PF motor cable
assembly
connector: J20
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Check 2:

Test" -> "Test 5:
4. Check if Main
Power Board
normally supplies
DC24V.
may be defective.
6. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
9-17
Reference
PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
If NG, check
connection of
MAIN board
assembly
connector: J12.
Replace PF motor
assembly.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
3
Message
E069 error
PF time-out
Event/
symptom
Time-out
condition in
media feed
amount (Xaxis) during
printer
operation.
Displayed if
pressure roller
does not reach
the defined
position.
Check item
Action
1. Check error history from "Test 7:

Record" of selfdiagnosis function.
endurance running
from "Life 2:PF
Motor" of selfdiagnosis function,
and check if "X
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Check 2:

Test" -> "Test 5:
may be defective.
5. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
Check connection of
PF motor cable
assembly
connector: J20
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
If NG, check
connection of
MAIN board
assembly
connector: J12.
Replace PF motor
assembly.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9-18
9 Troubleshooting
No.
4
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
E071 error
Overload
PF overcurrent condition in PF
from "Test 7:
motor (X-axis)
Record" of selfduring printer
diagnosis function.
operation.
endurance running
from "Life 2: PF
Motor" of selfdiagnosis function,
and check if "X
Action
-
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
Check connection of
PF motor cable
assembly
connector: J20
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Check 2:

Test" -> "Test 5:
may be defective.
5. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
Reference
PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
If NG, check
connection of
MAIN board
assembly
connector: J12.
Replace PF motor
assembly.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9-19
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Message
E 066 error
CR motor
E 068 error
CR encoder
Rev.-01
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Abnormal
1. Check error history condition in
from "Test 7:
CR motor (YRecord" of selfaxis) during
diagnosis function.
printer
Clean and lubricate
2. Move carriage in
operation.
CR rail roller guide.
both directions
Displayed if
while the printer is Check connection
the difference
of following
turned off, and
between motor
connectors.
check if there is any
command
position where
Main board:
value and
carriage does not
CR motor assembly
feedback from
move smoothly.
connector: J21
encoder is
large.
3. Set the number of CR cable connector:
J9 - J11
endurance running
Abnormal
cycles to 50 or more CR board:
condition in
from "Life 1: CR
CR cable connector:
head travel
Motor"
of
selfJ201 - J205
distance (Ydiagnosis
function,
axis) during
and check if "Y
printer
operation.
Displayed if
there is no
feedback from
encoder.
9-20
Reference
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
"8.5
Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-6
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
Message
Event/
symptom
E 070 error
CR time-out
Time-out
condition in
head travel
distance (Yaxis) during
printer
operation.
Displayed if
carriage does
not reach the
defined
position.
E 072 error
Overload
CR overcurrent condition in
CR motor (YE074 error
axis) during
CR2
printer
overcurrent
operation.
Check item
4. Check if T fence is
contaminated or
worn out.
Action
If grease or dust
"4.7.4
collect: Wipe fence Replacing T
with a dry cloth.
Fence" p.4-91
If ink deposit
presents: Wipe it off
with cloth
dampened with
neutral detergent.
5. Check "Encoder:
CR" from "Check 2:
Test" -> "Test 5:
6. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
9-21
Reference
"4.7.4
If contamination or Replacing T
deposit is too heavy: Fence" p.4-91
Replace T fence.
a) If NG:
Check following cable
connection.
"4.7.4
CR board assembly Replacing T
connector J207
Fence" p.4-91
"4.7.2
b) Replace following
Replacing
CR
parts.
Motor
T fence
CR motor assembly Assembly"
CR board assembly p.4-87
"4.8.3
CR cable
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
Replace MAIN
p.4-106
board assembly.
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC"
p.4-99
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
10
11
Message
E 081 error
CR origin
E 082 error
wiper sensor
Rev.-01
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
CR_HP
1. Check CR_HP
detection is not
sensor from "Sen 1:
possible.
CR Origin" of selfdiagnosis function.
Abnormal
condition in
wiper sensor.
Reference
Check connection
of CR_HP sensor
cable assembly
connector.
"5.5.4
Sensor
Menu" p.5-15
2. CR_HP sensor may

be damaged.
Replace CR_HP
sensor.
"4.13.6
Replacing
CR_HP
Sensor, Lever
Sensor" p.4159
3. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace MAIN
board assembly
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Wiper sensor
assembly may be
faulty.
1. Check connection
of wiper sensor
connector.
Main board
assembly may be
faulty.
2. Replace wiper
sensor.
9-22
3. Replace MAIN
board assembly.
"4.9.2
Replacing
Cleaner
Head" p.4121
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9 Troubleshooting
No.
12
13
Message
E 075 error
head cable
E 076 error
pre-heater
system
Event/
symptom
Abnormal
condition in
head cable or
head
thermistor.
Abnormal
condition in
pre-heater
system
(thermistor,
heater).
Check item
Action
1. Check connection Reconnect head cable.

of head cable
connectors on CR
board assembly side
and head side.
Is head cable
inserted obliquely?
Is it locked
securely?
E 077 error
platen heater
system
Abnormal
condition in
platen heater
system
(thermistor,
heater).
Replace head cable.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
3. Head thermistor
may be faulty.
Replace Print head

assembly.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
Disconnection of
connector, wrong
wiring, or heater
malfunction of
thermistor and heater
may be occurred.
1. Reconnect
connector of
thermistor and
heater.
"4.6.7
Replacing
Heater,
Thermistor"
p.4-68
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
2. Check connection
of board section.
Disconnection of
connector, wrong
wiring, or heater
malfunction of
thermistor and heater
may be occurred.
1. Reconnect
connector of
thermistor and
heater.
2. Check connection
of board section.
3. Replace heater.
15
E 078 error
after-heater
system
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
2. Is head cable
broken?
3. Replace heater.
14
Reference
Abnormal
condition in
after-heater
system
(thermistor,
heater).
9-23
"4.6.7
Replacing
Heater,
Thermistor"
p.4-68
"4.4
Replacing
Board Base
(X Rail
Section)" p.439
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Message
16
E 079 error
communication error
Event/
symptom
Abnormal
condition in
serial communication
between MAIN
board to
controller
board during
printing
operation.
Check item
Action
Communication
1. Check connection
cable may be faulty.
between MAIN
board to controller
F/W on controller
board.
board may be faulty.
Main board
assembly may be
faulty.
Controller board
assembly may be
faulty.
2. Check connection
between junction
board to controller
board.
3. Check firmware
version and install
the latest version.
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"5.5.2
Version
Menu" p.5-13
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16
4. Replace controller
board or MAIN
board.
17
E 080 error
junction error
Abnormal
condition in
serial communication
between
junction board
to controller
board during
printing
operation.
18
E 084 error
head
identification
Installed head
is incorrect.
Installed head is not

manufactured by other
vendor.
Replace head.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
19
E 085 error
head overheat
Abnormal
condition in
head driver.
Main board assembly

may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
20
E 086 error
head OVP
Abnormal
condition in
head
Head or head cable may 1. Check connection

be damaged.
of head cable.
21
2. Replace head.
E 087 error
Abnormal
Temperature
head transistor condition in
abnormality of head
thermistor
head transistor transistor on MAIN
board or sensor
abnormality of
thermistor may be
occurred.
Rev.-01
9-24
1. Replace thermistor.
2. Replace MAIN
board.
"4.8
Replacing
Cursor
Section" p.4105
"4.6.7
Replacing
Heater,
Thermistor"
p.4-68
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
22
E 097 error
NVRAM
Abnormal
condition in
NVRAM
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
23
E 118- E 121
error
sub tank Lo
[KCMY]
Abnormal
condition in
error sub tank
Lo sensor
Sub tank Lo sensor,

two-way valve or
junction board may be
defective.
1. Replace sub tank Lo

"4.11.1
sensor.
Replacing
Waste Fluid
2. Replace two-way
Bottle" p.4valve.
142
"4.10.5
3. Replace junction
Replacing
board.
Two-Way
Valve" p.4137
"4.5.1
Replacing
Heater
Junction
Board
Assembly"
p.4-58
9-25
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.2.4
Error Messages During File Transmission
This section describes the error messages displayed when sending backup parameters and firmware using
dedicated online software, as well as their recovery actions.
Table 9-6 Error Messages During File Transmission
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Transfer failed Firmware data Check if transferred

Data format
format is
firmware is an
error
inappropriate. appropriate file.
After confirming it,

install firmware again.
Transfer failed Cancel button Aborted by the on PC has been

HOST
pressed.
Transfer firmware
again.
Transfer failed Communication Check connection

After resolving
Data timeout
time-out
between printer and PC. problem, transfer
occurred.
firmware again.
Transfer failed File checksum Check-sum

error.
error
Reference
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16
1. Transfer firmware
again.
2. If error message is
still displayed,
check if transferred
firmware is an
appropriate file.
Transfer failed Received

Wrong size
wrong size
xxxxxxxx
data.
Check if program file is After confirming it,

appropriate.
transfer data again.
Transfer failed Incompatible

Incompatible firmware.
F/W
Check if program file is After confirming it,

appropriate.
install firmware again.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16
Transfer failed ROM erase

Flash erase
error.
error
Board may be defective. Replace MAIN board.
Transfer failed ROM writing

Flash write
error.
error
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Transfer failed ROM

Flash compare comparing
error
error.
10
Transfer failed FROM written Normally not detected.

Unknown
in unknown
FROM may be
Flash size
method is
defective.
detected.
Rev.-01
9-26
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-6 Error Messages During File Transmission (Continued)

No.
11
12
13
Message
Internal Error
Memory
Exhausted
Event/
symptom
No memory
area is
available.
Transfer failed Block reply

Block replay
timeout
timeout
occurred
during system
code transfer.
Check item
Normally not occurred.
SODIMM may be
defective.
Replace SODIMM.
Check connection
between control board
and MAIN board.
Reconnect control
board and MAIN
board.
Replace the cable

connecting control
board and MAIN
board.
Replace control
board.
Replace MAIN
board.
Transfer failed Invalid value is

Block replay
received during
error xx
system code
transfer.
14
Transfer failed Final reply

Final reply
timeout
timeout
occurred
during system
code transfer.
15
Transfer failed Invalid value is

Final reply
received during
error xx
final system
code transfer.
Action
9-27
Replace MAIN
board.
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.4.3
Replacing
HEATER
CONT
Board" p.442
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting

No.
16
Message
Boot Transfer
failed
Opening seq.
failed
Event/
symptom
Check item
Opening
sequence of
boot code
transfer failed.
Check connection
between control
board and MAIN
board.
Check if the green

LED on control
board is lit.
Check if the red

LED on control
board is blinking.
Action
Reconnect control
board and MAIN
board. Otherwise,
replace the cable
connecting control
board and MAIN
board.
If the green LED on

control board is off
after the power is
turned on, replace
the control board.
If the red LED is

blinking and there is
no problem at
connection between
control board and
MAIN board, try to
reinstall firmware.
If the red LED is

off, perform the
following
procedures.
1. Turn off the power,

then switch the DIP
switches as follows:
1: ON
2: ON
3: ON
4: OFF
2. Start the board
manager mode.
3. Reinstall firmware.
4. Turn off the power,
then switch the DIP
switches as follows:
1: ON
2: OFF
3: ON
4: OFF
5. Turn on the power,
then check if the red
LED is blinking.
Rev.-01
9-28
Reference
"4.4.3
Replacing
HEATER
CONT
Board" p.442
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"7.3
Working with
Dedicated
Network
Software"
p.7-7
9 Troubleshooting

No.
17
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Boot Transfer
failed
55-AA
Timeout
AA did not
Check connection
replied to Step between control board
55 of boot code and MAIN board.
transfer.
Boot Transfer
failed
55-AA reply
error xx
xx replied to
Step 55 of boot
code transfer.
19
Boot Transfer
failed
End code xx
An error (xx)
replied to
transfer end of
boot code.
20
Boot Transfer
failed
Echo timeout
Transfer
sequence echo
of boot code
did not reply.
21
Boot Transfer
failed
Echo error xx
Invalid transfer
sequence echo
of boot code
did not reply.
22
Internal error Failed in

Parameter save writing
error
parameter.
Normally not occurred. Replace MAIN board.

FROM may be
defective.
23
Transfer failed Invalid year

Wrong year
data (xxxx)
xxxx
received.
SODIMM or MAIN
board may be defective.
24
Transfer failed Invalid month

Wrong month data (xx)
xx
received.
25
Transfer failed Invalid day

Wrong date
data (xx)
xx
received.
26
Transfer failed Invalid hour

Wrong hour
data (xx)
xx
received.
27
Transfer failed Invalid minute

Wrong min
data (xx)
xx
received.
28
Transfer not
ready
18
Transfer is not Check if LED display

available.
on operation panel is in
waiting status of board
manager mode.
9-29
Reconnect control
board and MAIN
board.
Replace the cable

connecting control
board and MAIN
board.
Replace control
board.
Replace MAIN
board.
Reference
"4.4.3
Replacing
HEATER
CONT
Board" p.442
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.4Replace SODIMM.
49
Replace MAIN
board.
Press any button on

operation panel to make
the panel display
waiting state. Then,
reinstall the software.
"7.3
Working with
Dedicated
Network
Software"
p.7-7
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages

This section describes the symptoms of errors without an error message as well as the check items and
recovery actions.
9.3.1
Initial Operation Problems

Table 9-7 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems
No.
Symptom
Machine power
cannot be turned ON
Rev.-01
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Is operation panel
unit assembly cable
broken or shorted?
Replace panel cable.
"4.3.1
Replacing
Panel Unit"
p.4-30
2. Panel unit assembly

may be damaged.
Replace panel unit

assembly.
"4.3.1
Replacing
Panel Unit"
p.4-30
3. Inlet assembly may

be defective.
Replace inlet assembly.
"4.4.9
Replacing
Inlet
Assembly"
p.4-55
4. Power board
assembly may be
defective.
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
9-30
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-7 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems (Continued)
No.
2
Symptom
Abnormal LCD
operation (no
displays/garbled
characters)
Initial ink charge not

available
Check item
1. Check panel cable for
proper connection at
operation panel unit
assembly side and
MAIN board
assembly side.
Is the panel cable

inserted obliquely?
Is the connector
securely locked?
Action
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board
assemblyf: J5
Operation panel unit
assembly
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
2. Panel cable may be

damaged.
Replace panel cable.
"4.3.1
Replacing
Panel Unit"
p.4-30
3.
Replace panel board

assembly.
"4.3.1
Replacing
Panel Unit"
p.4-30
4. Main board assembly

may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
5. Power board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
1. Is "Sen: Cover open"

displayed on LCD
with front cover
closed?
Check connection of
cover sensor assembly
connector.
Replace cover sensor

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Front Cover
Sensor" p.432
2. Check panel cable for

proper connection at
assembly side and
MAIN board
assembly side.
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J5
Is operation panel
unit assembly LCD
damaged?
Is the panel cable

inserted obliquely?
Is the connector
securely locked?
9-31

assembly
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
3
Symptom
Check item
Reference
3. Is "Sen: Lever up"

displayed on LCD
with media set lever
lowered?
Adjust lever sensor.
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.491
4. Check MAIN board

assembly connectors
J30 for proper
connection.
Reconnect the
connector.
Replace lever sensor

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449

may be damaged.
Replace the main board

assembly.
After replacement,
execute initial charge
from "Check 8:
Parameter" "Parameter 2: Update"
- "Update 1: Head
Rank" in the selfdiagnosis function.
Follow the steps for the

message "[KCMY] No
Cartridge".
After adjustment/
replacement, execute
initial ink charge from
"Update 1: Head Rank"
of self-diagnosis
function.

message "Insert
specified cartridge".
After adjustment/
of self-diagnosis
function.
6. Are the following

self-diagnosis
functions judged as
normal when
checked with
specified cartridge
securely inserted?
Detection of
presence of ink from
"Ctrl 2: Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" -> "12:
Ink END".
Detection of
presence of cartridge
from "Ink Not"
7. Is specified cartridge
status judged as
normal when
checked through
"Ctrl 2: Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" -> "11:
Ink NOT KCMY" of
self-diagnosis
function with
specified cartridge
securely inserted?
Rev.-01
Action
9-32
"5.11.2
Parameter
Update
Menu" p.555
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
Check item
may be damaged.
Action
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
After replacement,
execute initial ink
charge from "Adj:
Input Rank" of selfdiagnosis function.
Though initial charge

has started, ink does
not reach head.
Is spring of ink system

assembly detached or
damaged?
If the part is detached,

remount it.
If the part is damaged,

replace ink system
assembly.
Though ink reaches

head, ink is not
discharged from head.
Is capping position
appropriate?
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
9-33
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
Operation
Manual
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
Check item
Ink is not discharged

though ink charge is
finished.
1. Are damper
assembly, ink tube
and SUS pipe joint
screws (K, Y, M, C)
securely tightened?
Is O-ring properly
installed?
2. Does shield part of

damper assembly
have air leak?
3. Is ink tube in ink

system assembly
bent?
Rev.-01
9-34
Action
Reference
Remove head cover

and check damper
assembly.
Remove side cover (L, R)

and cartridge cover, and
check ink tube and SUS
pipe joint screws.
"4.2.4
Removing
Side
Maintenance
Cover R"
p.4-11
"4.2.5
Removing
Side
Maintenance
Cover L" p.412
"4.2.11
Removing
Cartridge
Cover
(Lower)" p.419
Replace damper
assembly and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
9 Troubleshooting
No.
6
Symptom
Check item
4. Does pump motor
rotate during
cleaning operation?
Action
Reconnect MAIN
board assembly
connector J22.
Replace pump motor.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.2.2
Removing
Maintenance
Cover" p.4-9
5. When cleaning
operation is
performed, are gears
damaged or poorly
engaged?
Replace maintenance base

assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
6. When cleaning
operation is
performed, is
transmission gear
shaft damaged?

assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
7. Does ink tube have

bend, scratch, or
leak?
Replace damaged ink

tube and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow after
each replacement.
"4.7.10
Replacing
Ink Tube"
p.4-102
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Check connection of
head cable
connectors on CR
board assembly side
and head side.
Is head cable inserted

obliquely?
Is it locked securely?
9-35
Reconnect head cable.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.8.3
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
6
Rev.-01
Symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
9. Is head cable broken?
Replace head cable.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.8.3
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
10. Is print head

assembly damaged?
Replace print head

assembly.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
11. Is CR board
assembly damaged?
Replace CR board
assembly.
"4.8.3
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
12. Check connection of

CR cable connectors
on CR board
assembly side and
MAIN board
assembly side.
Reconnect following
connectors.
CR board assembly
connector: J201 - J205
"4.8.3
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449

obliquely?
Main board assembly

connector: J9 - J11
13. Is CR cable broken?
Replace CR cable.
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC"
p.4-99

may be defective.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
9-36
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
10
11
Symptom
Machine makes no
operations after
turned ON.
After turned ON,

machine displays
"Initializing" and
resets itself.
Machine does not

perform initialization
even if media is set.
Machine does not

start operation even if
front cover is closed.
Machine does not stop

even if front cover is
opened.
Check item
Action
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.3.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Cover
Sensor" p.431
1. Is "Sen: Cover open"

displayed on LCD
with printer cover
closed?
Or, is cover sensor
assembly function
detected as normal
when checked
through "Test 4:
Sensor" of selfdiagnosis function?
Check MAIN board

assembly connector
J38, J40.
Replace cover sensor

assembly.
2. Check panel cable

connectors at
assembly and MAIN
board assembly.
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J5
Is panel cable
inserted obliquely?

assembly: J1
3. Is "Set Paper"
displayed on LCD
with pressure arm
lowered?
Check MAIN board

assembly connector
J30.
Replace lever sensor

assembly.
4.
Check MAIN board

assembly connector
J42.
Replace P_REAR
sensor Assembly.
Reconnect DC cable
assembly.
Replace DC cable
assembly.
Is P_REAR sensor
assembly judged as
normal when
checked through
"Test 4: Sensor" of
self-diagnosis
function?
5. Is DC cable assembly
connected correctly
between power board
assembly and MAIN
board assembly?
9-37
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.6.6
Replacing
Lever Up
Sensor" p.467
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.6.5
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-65
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
11
12
Ink cartridge cannot

be detected even if
installed.
Check item
Reference

may be defective.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
7. Power board
assembly may be
defective.
Replace the power board

assembly.
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
1. Are the following

self-diagnosis
functions detected as
normal when
checked with
specified cartridge
securely inserted?

message "[KCMY] No
Cartridge".
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
After adjustment/
of self-diagnosis
function.

message "Insert
specified cartridge".
After adjustment/
of self-diagnosis
function.
Detection of
presence of ink from
"Ctrl 2: Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" -> "12:
Ink END"
Detection of
presence of cartridge
from "Ctrl 2: Sensor"
-> "Sen.3: etc" ->
"11: Ink NOT
KCMY"
2. Is specified cartridge
status detected as
normal when
checked through
"Ctrl 2: Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" -> "7-10:
[KCMY]Ink ID" of
self-diagnosis
function with
specified cartridge
securely inserted?
Rev.-01
Action
9-38
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
9 Troubleshooting
No.
13
14
Symptom
Operation panel
accepts no inputs.
Machine prints
nothing though it
receives data.
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Is operation panel
cover broken or
contaminated?
Replace operation panel

cover.
2. Check panel cable

connectors at
assembly side and
MAIN board
assembly side.
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J5
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
Is panel cable
inserted obliquely?

assembly: J1
3. Operation panel unit

assembly may be
damaged.
Replace panel unit

assembly.
"4.3.1
Replacing
Panel Unit"
p.4-30

may be
malfunctioning.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
1. Refer to "9.3.5
Online Function
Problem".
"9.3.5
Online
Function
Problems"
p.9-64
9-39
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.3.2
Media Feed Problems

Table 9-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems
No.
1
Symptom
Media comes off
during media set
initialization or
printing.
Media runs obliquely

or meanders during
media set
initialization or
printing.
Check item
Action
1. Are P_REAR sensor

assembly and
P_EDGE sensor
assembly detected as
normal when
checked through
"Test 4: Sensor" of
self-diagnosis
function?
Replace P_REAR
sensor assembly and
P_EDGE sensor
assembly.
2. Is suction fan run as

normal when
checked through
"Test 6: Fan" of selfdiagnosis function?
Check connection of
Media crinkles during

media set
initialization or
printing.
Check following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J42, J9 J11
CR board assembly:
J208, J201 - J203
Suction fan relay

assembly: J25 - J29
Replace suction fan

assembly.
Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate normally.
Reference
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN
Board" p.449
"4.8.3
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
"4.6.5
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-65
"4.8.11
Replacing
P_EDGE
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-118
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
p.4-76
Media jams during

media set
initialization or
printing.
3. When pressure lever

is moved backward
and forward, does
pressure assembly
move smoothly in
synchronization with
it?
Lubricate pressure cam.
"8.5
Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-6
Media is torn during

media set
initialization or
printing.
4. Does pressure roller

drag when pressure
lever is raised?
If pressure roller collects

media dust on itself, wipe
dust away using a wet soft
cloth.
Operation
Manual
Rev.-01
9-40
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems (Continued)
No.
Symptom
Check item
5. Does media guide
have large distortion
or foreign objects?
Machine registers
wrong media size
after media set
initialization.
Action
If media guide collects

media dust or other
foreign objects on it,
remove them.
Replace media guide.
Reference
"4.2.18
Removing
Media Guide
R (Upper)"
p.4-27
"4.2.19
Removing
Media Guide
R (Lower)"
p.4-29
6. When using roll

media, are flanges
attached correctly?
Insert flanges correctly into

core pipe of media roll.
Operation
Manual
Is media in use a
recommended one?
Set recommended media

and check printout again.
With non-authorized
media, media sensor may
fail to detect media
correctly.
Operation
Manual
9-41
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.3.3
Printing Problems
Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems
No.
1
Symptom
Machine cannot print
sequentially.
Media feed after

printing is excessive.
Rev.-01
Check item
1. Printer driver may be
defective.
Action
Update printer driver.
Reference
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16
2. Program ROM may be Update firmware.

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16

may be damaged.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
1. Is P_REAR sensor
assembly judged as
normal when checked
through "Test 4:
Sensor" of selfdiagnosis function?
Reconnect MAIN board

"4.4.7
assembly connector J42. Replacing
Replace P_REAR sensor MAIN Board"
p.4-49
assembly.
"4.6.5
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-65

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16

may be damaged.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
9-42
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems (Continued)
No.
3
Symptom
Missing dots in
printing.
Check item
Action
1. Is cleaning adequate?
Perform cleaning twice

consecutively.
Operation
Manual
2. Is ink tube filled with

ink?
Perform drop ink charge.
Operation
Manual
3. Perform "Check 4:
Adjustment" -> "Adj
1: NozzleChk" of
printer self-diagnosis
or "Test Print".
If the nozzle check patterns

"5.7.7 Test
are printed correctly, refer to Printing
the action in check item No. Menu" p.5-42
4.
4. Does pump motor
rotate during cleaning

operation?

"4.4.7
MAIN Board"
Replace Pump motor
p.4-49
assembly.
"4.9.3
Replace MAIN board
Replacing
assembly.
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
5. Are gears and

transmission gear shaft assembly.
damaged or poorly
engaged during
cleaning operation?
4
Reference
Nozzle plugging or ink 1. Is spring of ink system

splash is not eliminated
even after cleaning.
damaged?
2. Check cleaning wiper

condition.
9-43
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122

remount it.
replace ink system
assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
Wipe cleaning wiper

surface with accessory
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
Operation
Manual
If cleaning wiper is
"4.9.2
sticky with ink, replace it
Replacing
with a new one.
Cleaner Head"
p.4-121
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
4
Symptom
Check item
Nozzle plugging or ink 3. Is nozzle face wiped/

splash is not eliminated
rubbed correctly?
even after cleaning.
(Continued)
Action
Check wiper installation
condition and secure it
correctly.
4. Is registered head rank Enter correct head rank.

different from actual
head rank?
5. Does residual ink
collect on print head
assembly or in
nozzles?
Reference
"4.9.2
Replacing
Cleaner Head"
p.4-121
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
Clean head as follows.

"5.7.8
1. Clean head from "Adj HeadWash
9: HeadWash" of printer Menu" p.5-43
self-diagnosis.
"(1) Head
2. Perform initial ink
Rank"
p.5-56
charge from "Update 1:
Head Rank".
3. Check printouts again.
6. Check if CR_ENC
assembly and
T fence contact with
each other.
If they contact with each

other, adjust CR_ENC
assembly and T fence
positions.
If problem remains even

after position
adjustment, replace CR
board assembly and T
fence.
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
system assembly bent?
Rev.-01
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114

may be damaged.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
9-44
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Symptom
No printing.
Particular color is
missing.
Check item
1. Check power supply
voltage (DC24V,
DC42V).
Action
Replace power board
assembly.
2. Is spring of ink system

damaged?
3.
Is CR cable inserted
obliquely?
4. CR cable may be
damaged.

remount it.
replace ink system
assembly.
Reference
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
"4.10.1
Replacing Ink
ID Board
Assembly"
p.4-129

"4.4.7
assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly
MAIN Board"
connectors J201 - J205.
p.4-49
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
Replace CR cable assembly.
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC" p.499
5. Are damper assembly,

ink tube and SUS pipe
joint screws (K, C, M,
Y) securely tightened?
Is O-ring properly
installed?
Remove head cover and

check damper assembly.
6. Does shield part of
damper have air leak?
Replace damper
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.8.8
Replacing
Damper
Assembly
L_Assy" p.4112
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
9-45
"4.2
Remove side cover (L,
Removing
R) and I/H cover, and
check ink tube and SUS Covers" p.4-7
pipe joint screws.
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Symptom
Check item
8.
Action
Does ink tube have
bend, scratch, or leak?
9.
Are the following self-

diagnosis functions
detected as normal
when checked with
specified cartridge
securely inserted?
Detection of presence
of ink from "Ctrl 2:
Sensor" -> "Sen.3: etc"
-> "12: Ink END"
Detection of presence
of cartridge from "Ctrl
2: Sensor" -> "Sen.3:
etc" -> "11: Ink NOT"
11. Does pump motor

operation?
12. When cleaning

operation is
performed, does
transmission gear
rotate properly?
Rev.-01
9-46
Replace damaged ink

tube and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow after
each replacement.
Reference
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
message "[KCMY] No
Cartridge".
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
After adjustment/
of self-diagnosis
function.
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.10.1
Replacing Ink
ID Board
Assembly"
p.4-129

"4.4.7
assembly connector J22, Replacing
J23.
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Replace Pump motor
"4.9.3
assembly.
Replacing
Replace MAIN board
Maintenance
assembly.
Assembly"
p.4-122

assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
13. When cleaning

operation is
assembly.
performed, is
transmission gear shaft
damaged?
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
14. Check head cable

connectors at CR
board assembly side
and print head
assembly side.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106

obliquely?
Reconnect head cable.
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
16. CR board assembly

may be defective.
Replace CR board assembly.
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106

may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
9-47
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
6
Symptom
Machine outputs all
black printing.
Check item
Action
1. Check connection of Reconnect head cable.

head cable connectors
on CR board assembly
side and print head
side.

obliquely?
Reference
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
2. Is CR cable inserted
obliquely?

"4.4.7
assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly
MAIN Board"
connectors J201 - J205.
p.4-49
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
3. CR cable assembly
may be damaged.
Replace CR cable assembly.
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC" p.499
4. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head

"4.8.9
assembly.
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
7
8
9
10
may be
malfunctioning.
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106

may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Blocky printing
1. Is working
quality.
environment
Blocky image printing.
appropriate?
CR line seems dotted.
White or black lines
appear. (No missing or
ink crooking in step
patters in location 1G 7G in "Test Print")
Rev.-01
Use machine under specified

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
9-48
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Symptom
Check item
2. Have you started
printing immediately
after initial charge?
Action
Reference
Printing just after initial

Operation
charge may cause following Manual
symptoms.
Printed line blurs.
White lines appear.
In such cases, perform
cleaning two or three times
and check printout again.
If symptoms remain even
after cleaning, leave machine
unused for 1 hour or more.
Then perform cleaning again
and check printout.
If symptoms still remains,
refer to Operation Manual to
contact the technical support.
normal when checked

through "Test: Fan" of
self-diagnosis
function?
9-49
Check connection of
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
Suction fan relay 1 - 4 p.4-76
assembly: J25 - 29
Replace suction fan

assembly.
Replace cable of suction

fan that does not operate
normally.
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Symptom
Check item
4. Is shielding material
secured at specified
position?
Action
Remount it at specified
position.
Reference
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
p.4-76
5. If the media in
Adjust roll receiver assembly
"4.12.1
problem is roll media, position. Replace roll
Replacing Roll
does scroller rotate
receiver assembly.
Media Holder
evenly?
Assembly on
the VJ16_L
Side" p.4-144
"4.12.2
Replacing Roll
Media Holder
Assembly on
the VJ16_R
Side" p.4-145
6. Is PF belt tension
adjusted to
specification?
Adjust PF reduction belt

tension.
"(3)
Confirming
Completion of
Installation to
Plotter" p.7-20

condition.
Wipe cleaning wiper

surface with accessory
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
Operation
Manual
sticky with ink, replace it
with a new one.
8. Is nozzle face wiped/

rubbed correctly?

correctly.
9. Is T fence
contaminated?
Clean T fence.
If T fence is still
contaminated or
damaged, replace T
fence.

rotate harder when
pressure arm is raised? dust away using a wet soft
cloth.
Rev.-01
9-50
"4.9.2
Replacing
Cleaner Head"
p.4-121
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
Operation
Manual
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Symptom
Check item
Action
11. Does pump motor

operation?
Reference

"4.4.7
MAIN Board"
Replace pump motor
p.4-49
assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Replace MAIN board
Maintenance
assembly.
Assembly"
p.4-122
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
12. When cleaning

operation is
performed, does
transmission gear
rotate properly?

assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
13. When cleaning

operation is
and transmission gear
shaft damaged?

assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122

damaged?

remount it.
replace ink system
assembly.
"4.10.1
Replacing Ink
ID Board
Assembly"
p.4-129
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.10.1
Replacing Ink
ID Board
Assembly"
p.4-129
16. Is registered head

Enter correct head voltage.
voltage different from
actual head voltage?
9-51
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Rev.-01
Symptom
Check item
collect on head
assembly or in
nozzles?
Action
Reference

1. Clean head through
"Adj 9: HeadWash" of
"5.7.8
self-diagnosis function. HeadWash
2. Perform initial charge Menu" p.5-43
through "Update 1: Head
Rank".
3. Check plotouts again.
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
19. Are the following self-

diagnosis functions
judged as normal when
checked with specified
cartridge securely
inserted?
- Detection of presence
of ink from "Ctrl 2:
-> "11: Ink NOT"
- Detection of presence
of cartridge from "Ctrl
2: Sensor" -> "Sen.3:
etc" -> "12: Ink END"
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56

message "[KCMY] No
Cartridge".
After adjustment/
of self-diagnosis
function.

may be
malfunctioning.
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106

may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
9-52
9 Troubleshooting
No.
11
Symptom
Printout borders blur.
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Does purge correct

symptom?
Perform purge twice

consecutively.
Operation
Manual
2. Is media in use a
recommended one?
Set recommended media and

Operation
check printout again. With Manual
non-authorized media, media
sensor may fail to detect
media correctly.
3. CR cable assembly
may be damaged.
Replace CR cable assembly

wire.
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC" p.499
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
may be
malfunctioning.
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
6.
Main board assembly Replace MAIN board

may be damaged.
assembly.
9-53
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
12
Symptom
Many satellites
(unnecessary dots)
Check item

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
2. Is the ink level

remained sufficient?
Replace ink cartridge with

new one.
Operation
Manual
3. Perform purge three

times consecutively.
Plot out drawing again.
Operation
Manual
4. Perform test printing.
If nozzle check patterns are

plotted correctly, refer to step
(6)
5. Have you started

plotouting
immediately after
initial charge?
Be sure to wait 6 hours or

Operation
more after initial ink charge. Manual
Plotouting before ink charge
stabilization will not provide
adequate plotting quality.
6. Is CR belt tension
adjusted to
specification?
Adjust CR belt tension.
7. Check if PF_ENC
contact with each
other.

positions.

after position
adjustment, replace CR
fence.
Wipe cleaning wiper

Operation
surface with accessory Manual
cleaning wiper cleaning
cloth dampened with
small amount of purified
water. After wiping
cleaning wiper, perform
cleaning twice
consecutively.
"4.9.2
Replacing
sticky with ink, replace it Cleaner Head"
p.4-121
with a new one.

condition.
Rev.-01
Reference
1. Is working
environment
appropriate?
Shaggy plotout
Uneven lines (plotted
with stains)
Action
9-54
"7.6 CR
Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-31
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
9 Troubleshooting
No.
12
Symptom
Check item
9. Is nozzle face wiped/
rubbed correctly?
Action
correctly.

head rank?
11. Does pump motor

operation?
12. When cleaning

operation is
and transmission gear
shaft damaged?
"4.9.2
Replacing
Cleaner Head"
p.4-121
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56

"4.4.7
MAIN Board"
Replace pump motor
p.4-49
assembly.
Replace MAIN board
assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122

assembly.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122

damaged?

remount it.
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.

collect on print head
assembly or in
nozzles?
Reference

replace ink system
assembly.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122
"4.9.3
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-122

1) Clean head from "Adj
"5.7.8
9: HeadWash" of printer HeadWash
self-diagnosis.
Menu" p.5-43
2) Perform initial ink
charge from "Update
"(1) Head
1:Head Rank".
Rank" p.5-56
3) Check printouts again.
16. Is print head assembly Replace damaged print head

"4.8.9
damaged?
assembly.
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
9-55
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
12
13
14
Mixed color lines are

not overlaid.
Check item
Action

may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
adjusted to
specification?
"7.6 CR
Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-31

head rank?
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
3. Is head slant
inappropriate?
Adjust head slant.
"7.6 CR
Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-31
4. Are bi-directional
printing positions
aligned correctly?
Align bi-directional printing

"5.7.5 Unipositions.
D/Bi-D Low/
High
Adjustment"
p.5-35
5. Is CW adjustment
inappropriate?
Perform CW adjustment.
Black and other colors 1. Check if CR_ENC

do not align.
contact with each
other.
Rev.-01
Reference
9-56

positions.
"5.7.5 UniD/Bi-D Low/

High
Adjustment"
p.5-35
"4.8.3
Replacing
CR
Board
after position
adjustment, replace CR Assembly"
p.4-106
"4.7.4
fence.
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
9 Troubleshooting
No.
15
Symptom
Check item
Poor accuracy of
1. Is working
segment length in head
environment
travel direction (main
appropriate?
scan direction).
Action

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
adjusted to
specification?
3. Is T fence
contaminated?
Clean T fence.
If T fence is still
contaminated or
damaged, replace T
fence.
4. Internal process of
Initialize parameters and
MAIN board assembly reenter or modify them.
may be abnormal.
Then, check machine
operation again.
16
Poor linearity in head

scan direction
(straightness)
Reference
normal when checked

through "Test 6: Fan"
of self-diagnosis
function?
2. Is PF driving pulley
loose?
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
"5.11.1
Parameter
Initialization
Menu" p.5-52
Check connection of
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
Suction fan relay 1 - 4 p.4-76
assembly: J25 - J29

normally.
Replace suction fan

assembly.
Replace PF motor assembly.
3. Is PF speed reduction Adjust PF speed reduction

belt tension adjusted to belt tension.
specification?
9-57
"7.6 CR
Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-31
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
"(3)
Confirming
Completion of
Installation to
Plotter" p.7-20
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
16
Symptom
Check item
4. If the media in
problem is roll media,

evenly?
Action
Reference
Adjust roll receiver

assembly position.
"4.12.1
Replacing Roll
Media Holder
Assembly on
the VJ16_L
Side" p.4-144
"4.12.2
Replacing Roll
Media Holder
Assembly on
the VJ16_R
Side" p.4-145
Replace roll receiver

assembly.

rotate harder when
pressure arm is raised? dust away using a wet soft
cloth.
Rev.-01
9-58
Operation
Manual
9 Troubleshooting
No.
17
Symptom
Poor accuracy of
segment length in
media feed direction
(sub scan direction)
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Is working
environment
appropriate?

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
2. Is PF driving pulley
loose?
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
3. Is PF belt tension
adjusted to
specification?
Adjust PF speed reduction

belt tension.
"(3)
Confirming
Completion of
Installation to
Plotter" p.7-20

drag when pressure
lever is raised?

cloth.
Operation
Manual
5. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated

Operation
roller partially worn
with media dust, clean roller Manual
out?
with a nylon brush.
6. Is grid roller rotation
heavy? Does rattling
occur when it rotates?
7. If the media in
problem is roll media,
evenly?
9-59
Adjust roll receiver assembly

position.
Replace roll receiver
assembly.
Change media to be used.
"4.12.1
Replacing Roll
Media Holder
Assembly on
the VJ16_L
Side" p.4-144
"4.12.2
Replacing Roll
Media Holder
Assembly on
the VJ16_R
Side" p.4-145
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
18
19
Symptom
Check item
Action
Poor linearity in media 1. Is registered head rank Enter correct head rank.
feed direction (media
splicing accuracy)
head rank?
Poor right angle

accuracy
Rev.-01
Reference
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-56
2. Adjust head slant.
Adjust head slant.
"7.6 CR
Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-31
adjusted to
specification?
"7.6 CR
Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-31
4. Are bi-directional
printing positions
aligned correctly?
Align two-way printing

positions.

High
Adjustment"
p.5-35
5. Is T fence
contaminated?
Clean T fence.
If T fence is still
contaminated or damaged,
replace T fence.
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
6. Check if vertical lines Replace steel bearer

plotted from "Adj 3:
assembly.
HeadSlant" are not
connected even though
nozzle check pattern
from "Adj 1:
NozzleChk" of selfdiagnosis function is
adjusted properly.
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC" p.499
7. Is carriage assembly
loose?
Replace carriage assembly.
1. Is suction fan judged

as normal when
checked through "Test
6: Fan" of selfdiagnosis function?
9-60
Check connection of
following maintenance
board assembly
connectors.
Suction fan relay 1 - 4
assembly: J25 - J29
Replace suction fan

assembly.

normally.
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
p.4-76
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
19
Check item
drag when pressure
lever is raised?
Action
cloth.
Reference
Operation
Manual
3. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated

Operation
roller partially worn
out?
with a nylon brush.
9.3.4
Noise Problems
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems
No.
1
Symptom
Abnormal noise is
heard when media is
suctioned.
Check item
Action
1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and

objects or obstacles
foreign objects.
around rotating fin of
suction fan assembly?
Reference
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
p.4-76
2. Check damage of
If damaged, replace damaged cables and connection part.
of connectors.
3. Suction fan assembly
may be defective.
Replace suction fan

assembly.
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
p.4-76

may be
malfunctioning.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.6.8
Replacing
Suction Fan"
p.4-76
5. Power board assembly Replace power board

may be defective.
assembly.
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
9-61
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
No.
2
Symptom
Abnormal noise in
waiting mode
Abnormal noise is
heard while head is
moving laterally.
Check item
Action
1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and

objects or obstacles at foreign objects.
noise-generating
position?
Reference
-
2. Is abnormal noise
heard from board?
Replace applicable one of the

"4.4.2
following board assemblies. Replacing
Power board assembly Power Board
Assembly"
Main board assembly
p.4-41
CR board assembly
"4.4.7
Print head assembly
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
1. Does customer
recognize ink
discharge noise as
abnormal noise?
Explain machine operations. -
Additionally tighten screws.
"4.2
caused by loose screw
Removing
in covers?
Covers" p.4-7
3.
Is rattling noise heard

when moving carriage
laterally?
heard from CR cable?
Remove dust from

carriage bearing and
roller strip.
After cleaning roller
strip, always apply thin
lubricant film over its
surface using a greasesprayed cloth.
Remove twists from CR

"4.7.8
cable.
Replacing
If abnormal noise sounds CR_FFC" p.499
from between steel
bearer and tube guide,
replace tube guide.
Rev.-01
9-62
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
No.
Symptom
Check item
Action
5. Does the cable
connected to CR board
assembly on carriage
contact with CR
cover?
Abnormal noise is
heard during media
feeding.
Reference

"4.7.8
other, adjust the cable
Replacing
position.
CR_FFC" p.4If problem remains even 99
after position
adjustment, replace the
cable.
Replace it.
heard from CR driven
pulley bearing?
"4.7.6
Replacing CR
Driven Pulley"
p.4-96
adjusted to
specification?
"7.6 CR
Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-31
heard from CR motor
assembly?
Replace CR motor assembly.
"4.7.2
Replacing CR
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-87
1. Is PF speed reduction
belt slipping between
PF speed reduction
pulleys?
Replace PF speed reduction

belt.
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
heard from PF motor
assembly?
"4.6.2
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-61
3.
Is rough surface of
If grid roller is contaminated
Operation
grid roller partially
worn out?
with a nylon brush.
9-63
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.3.5
Online Function Problems

Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems
No.
Event/symptom
Scaling does not work

correctly.

defective.
Mirror function does

not work correctly.

defective.
Other functions do not 3. Main board assembly

work correctly.
may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Printing position is
incorrect.
1. Is CW adjustment
inappropriate?
Perform adjustment.

High
Adjustment"
p.5-35
2. Is adjustment of
P_EDGE sensor
inappropriate?
Perform adjustment.
"7.9
P_EDGE
Sensor
Sensitivity
Adjustment"
p.7-40

defective.
Operation
Manual
Rev.-01
Check item
Action
Reference
Operation
Manual
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16

may be damaged.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
9-64
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems(Continued)
No.
5
Event/symptom
Check item
Action
Some data are not

printed (missing).

defective.
Some data change to

garbage.

defective.
3. Is T fence
contaminated or worn
out?
If ink deposit presents:

Wipe it off with cloth
dampened with neutral
detergent.
If contamination or
deposit is too heavy:
Replace T fence.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
If NG, check connection

"4.4.7
of MAIN board
Replacing
assembly connector J12. MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Replace T fence.
Replace CR motor
assembly.
Replace CR board
assembly.
Operation
Manual
If grease or dust collect:

Wipe fence with a dry
cloth.
4. Check "Encoder CR"

from "Check 2: Test" > "Test 5: Encoder" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Reference
Replace CR cable.
"4.7.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-91
"4.7.2
Replacing CR
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-87
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
"4.7.8
Replacing
CR_FFC" p.499

may be
malfunctioning.
9-65
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems(Continued)
No.
6
Event/symptom
Media feed after
printout is excessive.
9.3.6
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Are print start position Update printer driver.

and layout method set
properly?
Operation
Manual
2.
Operation
Manual
Printer driver setting

may be unsuitable.
Modify the value to an

appropriate value (Media
size).

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-16
4.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Main board assembly Replace MAIN board

may be damaged.
assembly.
Other Problems
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions
No.
Event/symptom
Machine hangs up.
Check item
Reference
1. Internal process of
Initialize parameters and
MAIN board assembly reenter or modify them.
may be abnormal.
"7.3.1
Parameter
Backup" p.7-9

may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board

assembly.
"4.4.7
Replacing
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
Check by a circuit tester.
Machine power is shut 1. Is power cable

off during printing.
shorted?
Rev.-01
Action
2. Is there any electric

leakage?
Check for short to chassis

ground due to damaged cable
insulation.

voltage (DC5V).
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41

voltage (DC24V).
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
9-66
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions (Continued)

No.
Event/symptom
Check item
5. Power board assembly Replace power board

may be defective.
assembly.
Ink spills out of waste

fluid box.
Ink spills out of

flushing box.
Replace ink sensor assembly.
1. Check inside of waste Replace waste ink absorber

fluid box.
sheet.
2. Check presence of ink
cartridge from "Ctrl 2:
-> "12: Ink END" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Reference
"4.4.2
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-41
Ink cartridge cannot be 1. Is pointer of ink sensor Replace ink sensor assembly.
"4.10.4
inserted.
assembly deformed or
Replacing
damaged?
Cartridge
Holder
Assembly"
p.4-136
2. Is ink NOT sensor
(black resin lever
switch) of ink sensor
assembly damaged?
Action
"4.10.4
Replacing
Cartridge
Holder
Assembly"
p.4-136
-
Remove all cartridges and

"5.5.4
lightly push the switch of ink Sensor Menu"
NOT sensor (BK, C, M, Y) p.5-15
with something with a flat tip
such as ballpoint pen to
check that the display of "12:
Ink END" changes.
3. Is waste fluid tube

Reinstall it.
coming out of flushing
box bent?
"4.6.12
Replacing
Flushing
Absorber" p.482
1. Is flushing box
clogged with dust?
"4.6.12
Replacing
Flushing
Absorber" p.482
Remove dust.
Replace flushing box

assembly.
2. Is waste fluid tube

Reinstall waste fluid tube.
coming out of flushing
box bent?
3. Does ink accumulate Replace flushing box

in ink absorber sheet in assembly.
flushing box?
"4.6.12
Replacing
Flushing
Absorber" p.482
9-67
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions (Continued)

No.
Event/symptom
Check item
Action
Ink spills around X rail. 1. Extension tube may be

disconnected under ink
system assembly.
Reference
Remove maintenance
"4.9.3
base assembly and check Replacing
if extension tube is
Maintenance
connected.
Assembly"
p.4-122
Replace pump motor
assembly.
9.3.7
Replace ink system

assembly.
"4.10.1
Replacing Ink
ID Board
Assembly"
p.4-129
2. Ink tube may be cut.
Replace ink tube.
"4.7.10
Replacing Ink
Tube" p.4-102
3. Print head, MAIN

board assembly and
CR board assembly
may be defective.
After removing ink cartridge,

"4.4.7
check if each board operates Replacing
properly.
MAIN Board"
p.4-49
"4.8.9
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-114
"4.8.3
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-106
Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software

Table 9-13 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software
No.
Event/symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
MUTOH Maintenance
Assistant does not start
up.
Perform reinstallation and

Network
initial setting.
Administration
Manual
"Transfer failed (Data

timeout)" is displayed
during transfer.
1. Are printer and PC

connected correctly
with network cable
(crossover cable for
direct connection and
straight cable for
connection via hub)?
Yes: Proceed to (2).

No: Connect printer and
PC correctly.
Rev.-01
9-68
"7.3.3
Required
Environment"
p.7-10
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-13 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software (Continued)

No.
Event/symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
2. Is PC IP address
appropriate?

"(5) PC IP
No: Adjust TCP/IP
Address
properties from
Setting" p.7-12
[Properties] of [Local
Area Connection] in
[Network Connections]
setting of PC. PC and
printer must have the same
subnet address (i.e.
192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253).
3. Is any device of the

same IP address as PC
or printer connected to
hub?
Yes: Disconnect the

applicable device from
network.
No: Proceed to (4).
4. Is printer started in
board manager mode
and only POWER
LED turned on?

"(7)
No: Start printer in board Starting Board
manager mode. If LCD
Manager
displays nothing, engine Mode" p.7-14
component may be
defective or firmware may
not be installed (including
power cutoff due to power
failure during installation
or other causes.)
5. Is printer IP address
appropriate?

"(4)
No: Engine board may by Printer IP
defective
Address
Check" p.7-11
6. Is LAN
communication
between PC and other
device available?
Yes: Connect PC with

other device with LAN
cable and check with
method such as ping
command.
No: PC or engine board
may by defective.
9-69
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-13 Problems in Using Dedicated Network Software (Continued)

No.
Event/symptom
"Error received: Buffer

overflow." is displayed
during transfer.
Check item
Firmware size is too large.

Check if transferred
firmware is an appropriate
file.
Action
Reference
Printer repeats buzzer

"7.3.5
operation in short cycles as Firmware
well as display of the
Installation"
message shown below on p.7-16
LCD. All LEDs of ROLL
MEDIA, CUT MEDIA,
COLOR and
MONOCHROME also
flash simultaneously.
Transfer failed
Data format error
To stop the buzzer, press

any key except for the
[Power] key once.
To return to status in
which installation is
available, press any key
except for the [Power] key
once again.
4
The "Transfer failed

incompatible F/W" error
message is still displayed
though the proper
firmware is being
transferred.
Rev.-01
This is a main board that

has firmware from a
different model installed to
it. Check the DIP switch
settings on the main board.
9-70
Turn the DIP switch

"(1) DIP
(SW3-2) on the
Switch Settings
circuitboard ON, and
on the Main
perform installation.
Board" p.7-16
When installation is
complete, set the DIP
switch back to its original
position.
10 Appendix
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 10- 2
10.2 Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 10- 2
10.3 Maintenance Part List........................................................................... 10- 2
10.4 Exploded View....................................................................................... 10- 7
10-1
Rev.-01
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides referential information such as service data and exploded views.
10.2 Wiring Diagram

For wiring diagram, see information below.
TIP
Separate sheet Wiring Diagram p.1
10.3 Maintenance Part List

The following table lists the maintenance parts per unit. The part number below is identical to that of the
exploded view.
Table 10-1 X Rail Assembly

No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Part number
Remarks
X speed reduction belt
DF-43883
Common with VJ26
Thermistor assembly
DF-44115
For after-heater
Thermistor assembly
DF-46639
For platen heater, common in

VJ series
AC inlet, large, 15A
DF-48402
Common with VJ26
DF-48975
Common with VJ12
PF_ENC_A0_assembly
DF-48985
Common in VJ series
PF motor assembly
DF-49020
Common in VJ series
DF-49022
Common in VJ series
DF-49471
Common parts for the CR

origin sensor and the lever
sensor
10
MAIN board assembly
DF-49658
Common with VJ12
11
HEATER CONT board

assembly
DF-49660
Common with VJ12
12
HEATER RELAY board

assembly
DF-49661
Common in VJ series
13
Fuse
DF-49683
Common in VJ series
14
Suction fan
DG-40311
Common with VJ26
10-2
10 Appendix
Table 10-1 X Rail Assembly (Continued)

No.
Part name
Part number
Remarks
15
PF speed reduction pulley
DG-40312
Common with VJ26
16
Media holder
DG-40313
Common with VJ26
17
Flushing tray (VJ)
DG-40317
Common with VJ26
18
Flushing absorber
DG-40318
Common with VJ26
19
Platen nonreflective tape
DG-40319
Common with VJ26
20
PF_ENC scale
DG-40320
Common with VJ26
21
CONTROL to RELAY FFC1

(VJ26)
DG-40321
Common with VJ26
22
VJ16 platen heater assembly
DG-40348
23
P_REAR_R sensor assembly

(VJ16)
DG-40349
24
VJ16 after-heater assembly
DG-40350
25
VJ16 pre-heater assembly
DG-40351
26
Thermistor assembly
DG-?????
For pre-heater
Table 10-2 Y Rail Assembly

No.
Part name
Part number
Remarks
CR driven pulley assembly
DF-43868
Common with VJ26
CR motor assembly
DF-43869
Common with VJ26
CR drive pulley assembly
DF-43870
Common with VJ26
T fence (64)
DF-43901
Common with 8000 series
Steel belt (64)
DF-43937
Common with 8000 series
DF-43940
Common with VJ26
Pressure roller
DF-46666
Common with VJ26
DF-49471
Common parts for the CR

origin sensor and the lever
sensor
Heater junction board

assembly
DG-40135
Common in VJ series
10
VJ16_CR_FFC_assembly
DG-40352
10-3
Rev.-01
10 Appendix
Table 10-3 Cursor Assembly

No.
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Cutter solenoid assembly
DF-42234
Common with VJ12
O-ring, M6
DF-46671
Common with VJ series
O-ring, M7
DF-46672
Common with VJ series
Damper L_assembly
DF-48141
Common with VJ26
P_EDGE assembly
DF-48983
Common in VJ series
CR_ENC assembly
DF-48986
Common in VJ series
Solenoid spring assembly
DF-49062
Common with VJ12
CR board assembly
DF-49659
Common with VJ12
Print head
DF-49684
Common with VJ12
10
VJ cursor roller arm assembly
DG-40326
Common with VJ26
11
VJ16 cursor head base

assembly
DG-40353
12
Head FFC (VJ16)
DG-40354
Table 10-4 Maintenance Assembly

No.
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Cleaner head assembly
DF-49687
Common with VJ12
Flushing tray (VJ)
DG-40317
Common with VJ26
Flushing absorber
DG-40318
Common with VJ26
VJ16 flushing box assembly
DG-40355
VJ16 maintenance assembly
DG-40356
VJ16 pump absorber

assembly
DG-40357
Table 10-5 IH Assembly

No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Ink ID board assembly
DF-43968
Common in VJ series
O-ring, M6
DF-46671
Common in VJ series
O-ring, M7
DF-46672
Common in VJ series
Frame assembly, hook
DF-46700
Common with VJ26
10-4
10 Appendix
Table 10-5 IH Assembly (Continued)

No.
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Two-way valve assembly
DF-47837
Common with VJ26
VJ cartridge holder assembly
DG-40339
Common with VJ26

(VJ26)
DG-40340
Common with VJ26
VJ subtank assembly
DG-40341
Common with VJ26
VJ subtank lower absorber

assembly
DG-40342
Common with VJ26
Table 10-6 Leg Assembly

No.
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Waste fluid level switch

assembly
DF-44172
Common with VJ26
Waste fluid bottle
DF-47867
Common with VJ26
Table 10-7 Roll Media Tray Assembly

No.
Part name
Part number
VJ16_L roll media holder

assembly
DG-40358
VJ16_R roll media holder

assembly
DG-40359
Remarks
Table 10-8 Cover Assembly

No.
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Cover sensor (C) assembly
DF-47864
Common for the front cover

sensor and the maintenance
cover sensor, common with
VJ26
Panel unit assembly
DF-48977
Common in VJ series
DF-49022
Common with VJ26
DG-40346
Common with VJ26
Front cover gear
DG-40347
Common with VJ26
Panel FFC (VJ16)
DG-40360
F cover R sensor assembly

(VJ16)
DG-40361
10-5
Rev.-01
10 Appendix
Table 10-8 Cover Assembly (Continued)

No.
Part name
Part number
F cover L sensor assembly

(VJ16)
DG-40362
Maintenance cover sensor

assembly (VJ16)
DG-40366
Remarks
Table 10-9 Take-up Unit Assembly (Optional)

No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Part number
Remarks
VJ take-up motor assembly
DG-40471
Common with VJ12
Drive roller
DG-40472
Common with VJ12
Holder roller
DG-40473
Common with VJ12
Holder roller L
DG-40474
Common with VJ12
Drive collar
DG-40475
Common with VJ12
VJ take-up scroller 16
DG-40477
Common with VJ12
DF-49471
Common with VJ12
VJ take-up CNT board

assembly
DG-40478
Common with VJ12
Power source (take-up for

foreign use)
DF-44506
Common with RJ-8000
10
VJ take-up SW board
assembly
DG-40479
Common with VJ12
11
W_ON sensor assembly
DG-40480
Common with VJ12
12
W_OFF sensor assembly
DG-40481
Common with VJ12
13
AC cable assembly
DG-40482
Common with VJ12
14
DC cable assembly
DG-40483
Common with VJ12
15
Power cable 10A (for U.S.

use)
DG-40484
Common with VJ12
16
Power cable 7A (for Japan

use)
DG-40485
Common with VJ12
10-6
10 Appendix
10.4 Exploded View

For exploded views and the maintenance parts, see information below.
TIP
Separate sheet Exploded View p.2-p.10
10-7
Rev.-01
10 Appendix
Rev.-01
10-8
Supplement Electric Diagram
Electric Diagram
PANEL UNIT J1
PUMP1
PUMP MOTOR 1 CABLE ASSY

(VJ16)
TR
CONNECTOR
AC
W_ORG
DC
+5V
+12V
+24V
+42V
N
L
Connector Joint
CR ORIGIN SENSOR
CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
TRANSMISSION TYPE CONNECTOR (RESERVED)
Waste_Fluid_Full_sensor
WASTE FLUID SENSOR

CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
WASTE FLUID BOX SENSOR L
Connector Joint
(Optional)
L,N
P_REAR_R
J3
DIMM(128M)
MOTOR DRIVER
P_REAR SENSOR ASSY (VJ16)
INK SENSOR Magenta
J17
INK SENSOR Yellow
J18
Reserved connector 1 for Ink Sensor
J19
Reserved connector 1 for Ink Sensor
E-F-66AD
Noise
Filter
J4
CLKDV JTAG
COVER_R
FRONT COVER R
SENSOR ASSY (VJ16)
COVER_L
FG
FRONT COVER L
SENSOR ASSY (VJ16)
J39
J20
MAIN Board Assembly
COOLING FAN (5V)
POST HEADER ASSY
TERMINAL BLOCK to CNT

AC CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
CN001
P/ S
J33
J21
J35
PF MOTOR CABLE ASSY (VJ16)

PF ENCORDER
CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
Oppositte side
to origin
Plt_Heat
J6
PLT_H1 CABLE ASSY
PLT_H2 CABLE ASSY

PRE_H1 CABLE ASSY
Origin side
Origin side
Oppositte side
to origin
Pre_Heat
Pre_Heat
PRE_H2 CABLE ASSY

PrAft_Heat
e_Heat
Origin side
Platen_thrm
Oppositte side
to origin
Platen_thrm
Origin side
Oppositte side
to origin
AFT_H CABLE ASSY

PLT_T1 CABLE ASSY
PLT_T2 CABLE ASSY
Pre_thrm
Pre_thrm
Origin side
After_thrm
Oppositte side
to origin
After_thrm
PRE_T1 CABLE ASSY

PRE_T2 CABLE ASSY
AFT_T1 CABLE ASSY
AFT_T2 CABLE ASSY
J5
J8
CUTTER SOLENOID
RELAY ASSY (VJ16)
J10
J202
J205
J2
J40
J9
J203
J7
HEAD
ID380
CUTTER SOLENOID
ASSY
J 211
J28
PRESSURE ARM
J29
J1
SUCTION FAN CABLE 1 ASSY

(VJ16)
MIST_FAN CABLE2
ASSY (VJ16)
Debug CN
J45
J43
J41
J4
J8
HEAD FAN CABLE 1

ASSY (VJ16)
POW-ON
CNT to RLY FFC1 (VJ26)
J22
ACIN
J23
EXT-AC-OUT
HEAD FAN CABLE 2

ASSY (VJ16)
HEAD_FAN
J14
FG
J13
????
J12

(VJ16)
Vacum_FAN (#2)

(VJ16)
Vacum_FAN (#3)
J10
INK SLOT 6

(VJ16)
Vacum_FAN (#4)
J 11
SUB TANK 1
J12
SUB TANK 2
J13
SUB TANK 3
J14
SUB TANK 4
J15
SUB TANK 5
J16
SUB TANK 6
J18
EX_SLOT 1
J15
J16
J17
Debug
J11
J18
RSVIN1
J13
RSVOUT1
J14
RSVIN2
J16
J2
CONTROL to JUNCTION CABLE ASSY (VJ26)
(for serial communication)
INK SLOT 5
DC IN
J3
Communi cat i on
J4
JUNCTION TO JUNCTION
J20
J 20
EX_SLOT 2
DCIN
J19
J 23
EX_SLOT 3
J 24
EX_SLOT 4
J17
EX_ACT_1
J19
EX_ACT_2
J 21
EX_ACT_3
J 22
EX_ACT_4
HEATER
CONTROL
BOARD
J2
FEED-M
J3
FEED-S
J4
WIND-M
J5
WIND-S
J1
Config CN
J11
J14
RSVOUT2
J15
EX THRM1
J17
EX THRM2
J18
M
SUB_TANK L
S
Not
INK
SLOT4
End
Y
SUB_TANK L
2SOL
J9
ACOUT
SMART CARD
INK
SLOT3
End
SUB_TANK H
SUB TANK
CONTROL CABLE (VJ26)
Vacum_FAN (#1)
J8
J6 RELAY A
J3
INK CARTRIDGE
CNT to JC POWER CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
J9
S
Not
SUB_TANK H
MAIN to CNT POWER CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
J10
J21
HEATER
RELAY
INK CARTRIDGE
HEAD_FAN
J1
J7 RELAY B
J20
MIST FAN3
LVDS
SUB_TANK L
2SOL
MAIN to CNT SERIAL CABLE
J12
Rev2_thrm
MIST_FAN CABLE1
ASSY (VJ16)
POW
SUB TANK
HEAD_FFC (VJ16) x 2
J32
COOLING FAN
CABLE ASSY (24V)
End
J13
For releasing
head lock
(Cutter is not
attached.)
HEAD FG CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
J9
E-292156-2
COOLING
SOL
J38
J26
INK
SLOT2
PG_ORG
J1
J7
Rev1_thrm
E-292156-2
E-292156-2
J2
J19
MIST FAN1
MIST FAN2
P_EDGE SENSOR
ASSY
J204
CNT BOARD to HEATER RLY BOARD

HEATER SIDE FUSE to RLY

FG
HEATER SIDE FG CABLE ASSY (VJ26)
Plt_Heat
J 208
J201
E-F-66AD
Origin side
CR_ENCODER
ASSY
CR_FFC (VJ16) x 3
J25
Not
SUB_TANK H
PG ORIGIN SENSOR
TERMINAL ASSY (VJ16)
J34
2SOL
J 207
J11
INLET (LARGE)
INK CARTRIDGE
SUB TANK
J 206
J44
J13
J6
CR_MT
J 209
J8
Option IF
J6
SUB_TANK L
2SOL
PF_MT
J46
E-F-66BD
FUSE
J12
CR BOARD
ASSY
MAIN BOARD SIDE INLET to FUSE

BOX CABLE ASSY (VJ26)
Noise
Filter
End
PF_ENC
CR MOTOR CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
J42
CN301
INK
SLOT1
SUB_TANK H
E- 292156- 4
J12
J36
COOLING FAN 3 (24v)
TERMINAL BLOCK to POWER

J 210
COOLING FAN (5V)
S
Not
J1
J2
Config CN
J37
Terminal Stand
SHORT BAR
INK CARTRIDGE
SUB TANK
Config CN
CPLD
E-F-66BD
FUSE
HEATER SIDE FG
CABLE ASSY (VJ26)
USB
J5
J 11
J30
LAN
MAIN BOARD SIDE FUSE to TERMINAL BLOCK
CABLE ASSY (VJ26)
INLET (SMALL)
HEATER
J UNCTION
MAINTENANCE COVER SENSOR L
J16
J7
Option IF
MAIN BOARD SIDE INLET to FUSE

BOX CABLE ASSY (VJ26)
MAINTENANCE COVER SENSOR R
MAINTENANCE COVER
SENSOR ASSY (VJ16)
INK SENSOR Cyan
LB1845
J24
LEVER SENSOR
CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
TRANSMISSION TYPE CONNECTOR (RESERVED)
AC_HEATER
J15
J27
LEVER_Up
N/A
MOTOR DRIVER
A3955SLB2
J22
J23
WIPER ORIGIN SENSOR

CABLE ASSY (VJ16)
CR_ORG
J14
J5
FFC for Panel Unit (VJ16)
J10
Supplement Self-Diagnosis Function Configuration Diagram 1 & 2
Self-Diagnosis Function Configuration Diagram 1 & 2
Self-Diagnosis Function Configuration Diagram (1/3)

for Ver. 1.06
Adj.Platen
Test
InkCharge
Adjustment
Adj.Platen
Self-Diagnosis Function Configuration Diagram(1/4)

Nozzlcheck
Check Skew
HeadSlant
Test
Ram Capacity
Version
Firm
Parameter
DipSW
Board Rev.
Panel
Key
LCD
LED
Sensor
CR Origin
WasteTank
Wiper
Cover
M.Cover L
M.Cover R
Lever
EdgeAD
Rear
HeadGap
Head
Trans.1
Trans.2
Encorder
CR
PF
Fan
Vacum Fan
Cooling Fan
Head Fan
Record
Maintenance
Error
Error Init.
Wiper
CR Motor
PF Motor
PrintNumber
Cleaning
Fire 1-A
Fire 1-B
Fire 2-A
Fire 2-B
Fire 3-A
Fire 3-B
Fire 4-A
Fire 4-B
PUMP
LockSole
240CW
240CCW
320CW
320CCW
Uni/Bi Low
Uni/Bi High
Uni-D 240
Uni-D 320
Uni-D 240B
Uni-D 320B
Bi-D 240
Bi-D 320
Bi-D 240B
Bi-D 320B
SideMargin
Initialize
Check
TestPrint
HeadWash
HeadWash2
CountClear
SendPitch
FillPattern
Adjust ALL
Parameter
Log Info
Economy
Normal
Strong
Print
SetTime
Adjust ALL
Parameter
Log Info
Parameter
Initialize
Update
InkCharge
Little
Adjustment
Cleaning
Print
SetTime
Parameter
Servo
Endurance
PaperFeed
ExControl
PaperInitial
Setup
Print 1
Print 2
Adj. Volt
240CW
240CCW
320CW
320CCW
Uni/Bi Low
Uni/Bi High
Head
Wiper
CR Motor
PF Motor
Pump
ALL
Uni-D 240
Uni-D 320
Uni-D 240B
Uni-D 320B
Bi-D 240
Bi-D 320
Bi-D 240B
Bi-D 320B
Head Rank
Adj. Volt
Uni/Bi Low
Uni/Bi High
SideMargin
Charge Flg
SerialNo.
ChipName
Debug Bit
Normal
Economy
Normal
Strong
Slant
F and B
Adj. Volt
Cleaning
HeadSignal
Cleaning
Print
240CW
240CCW
320CW
320CCW
Uni-D 240
Uni-D 320
Uni-D 240B
Uni-D 320B
Bi-D 240
Bi-D 320
Bi-D 240B
Bi-D 320B
Refer to Self-Daignosis Function Configuration Diagram (2/4)
Servo
Endurance
PaperFeed
ExControl
PaperInitial
Self-Daignosis Function Configuration Diagram (3/4)
Supplement Self-Diagnosis Function Configuration Diagram 3 & Maintenance Mode 2 Configuration Diagram
Self-Diagnosis Function Configuration Diagram 3 & Maintenance Mode 2 Configuration Diagram
Maintenance Mode 2 Configuration Diagram

for Ver. 1.06
Adj.Platen
Test
InkCharge
Adjustment
Cleaning
Print
SetTime
Parameter
Indication
Used Ink K
Used Ink C
Used Ink M
Used Ink Y
PrintNumber
Waste Ink
CR Motor
PF Motor
Pump
Head K1
Head K2
Head C1
Head C2
Head M1
Head M2
Head Y1
Head Y2
Cleaner
InitCounter
Print Num.
Ink
ALL
NVRAM
Timer
CR Motor
PF Motor
HeadUnit
Cleaning
Pump
Shipping
Initialize
Update
Servo
Endurance
Servo1 (240cps CW)

Servo2 (240cps CCW)
Servo3 (320cps CW)
Servo4 (320cps CCW)
GP
GI
GLPF
scale
C
CR Motor
PF Motor
Pump
Nozzle
Total Life
Check
PaperFeed
ExControl
PaperInitial
Version
Sensor
MistFan
Tank Status
Tank Valve Check
etc
Heater
Pre
Platen
After
Record
Pre.H
Platen.H
After.H
Top&Width
Width
Off
Print
Pre1
Pre2
Platen1
Platen2
After1
After2
K Ink ID
C Ink ID
M Ink ID
Y Ink ID
Ink Not
Ink END
PaperFeed
Supplement X Rail Assy 1
X Rail Assy 1
1 23 4 56 7
A-38
Exploded View
A-112
A-111
A-36
A-110
A-109
A-35
A-114
A-117
A-44
A-249
DG-40320
A-43
A-18
A-41
A-118
DG-40312
A-19
B-5
DG-40317
A-120
A-97
A-116
DF-43883
DG-40313
DF-49020
A-80
A-34
A-41
A-26
DF-48985
A-122
A-128
A-127
A-124
A-81
A-125
DG-40319
DG-40318
A-248
A-119
A-30
A-24
A-252
H-7
A-115
A-31
A-25 A-28
A-251
A-121
B-5
A-20
A-42
A-35
A-27
A-21
A-130
A-37
A-22
A-126
A-23
A-253
A-131
A-19
A-130
A-82
A-84
A-85
A-86
A-87
A-92
A-83
A-69
A-254
A-129
A-41
DG-40313
H-5
DF-46639
A-84
A-85
A-86
A-87
A-60
A-58
A-15
A-16
A-246
A-12
A-49 A-48
A-5
A-217
DF-46639
DG-40311
A-224
A-231
A-230
A-234
DF-49471
A-5
A-215
A-222
A-5
A-82
A-13
A-63
A-92
A-66
DG-40348 A-216
A-75
A-62
A-16
A-16 A-225
A-242
A-235
A-236
A-239
A-237
A-241
A-61
A-76
H-3
A-83
A-77
A-240
A-10
A-74
A-15
A-8
A-298
A-271
DF-49658
A-56
A-243
A-244
H-1
A-12
A-299
A-69
A-71
A-226
B-28
A-90
A-59
A-70
A-245
A-223
A-88
A-68
A-18
B-5
A-13
A-97
A-94
A-91
A-64
A-43
A-14
A-16
A-89
A-67
A-247
A-269
A-9
A-270
A-4
A-4
A-261
A-95
A-260
A-261
A-264
A-294
A-260
A-68
DF-49683
A-280(A-291)
A-281(A-292)
A-278(A-289)
A-279(A-290)
A-265
A-55
A-295
A-100
A-1
A-266
A-101
R
O
H-2
A-51
A-52
A-287
A-258
A-276
A-274
DF-48402
A-285
A-257
A-303
X Rail Assy 1
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
Supplement X Rail Assy 2
X Rail Assy 2
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
A-180
A-188
A-181
A-190
A-184
A-186
A-183
A-196
A-190
A-184
A-187
A-185
A-183
A-214
A-209
A-208
A-206
DG-40349
A-202
A-108
A-107
A-106
DF-44115
DG-40???
A-211
A-105
A-205
A-182
A-209
A-207
A-206
A-137
A-203
A-196
A-204
A-136
A-193
DG-40350
DF-49022
A-177
A-174
A-168
A-167
DG-40351
A-201
A-135
A-134
A-139
A-175
A-176
A-170
A-162
DG-40321
A-200
A-213
A-137
A-153
A-152
A-212
A-191
DF-49661
A-145
A-138
A-140
A-141
A-161
A-214
A-210
DF-49660
A-149
A-148
A-194
DF-48975
R
O
A-173
X Rail Assy 2
A-192
A-146
A-189
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
Supplement Y Rail Assy
Y Rail Assy
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
B-125
B-162
A-111
A-112
B-128
A-110
A-109
B-122
A-118
DF-43868
A-114
B-52
A-117
B-53
A-120
B-106
B-127
B-119
B-54
B-101
B-105
B-93
DG-40352
B-55
B-51
B-120
B-50
B-118
B-119
B-104
B-102
B-103
A-116
A-115
B-100
B-99
A-122
B-92
B-94
B-95
A-129
A-130
A-124
A-125
B-24
B-117
B-12
B-121
B-113
A-126
B-116
B-33
B-112
DF-49471
A-131
B-6
A-130
A-129
B-23
B-115
B-165
B-11
B-23
B-24
B-131
B-117
B-95
B-5
B-126
A-118
A-121
B-122
B-114
DF-43901
B-39
B-9
B-114
B-45
DF-43869
B-40
B-47
B-24
B-38
B-46
B-23
B-37
B-44
B-15
B-24
B-36
B-43
B-23
B-71
B-76
B-74
B-18
B-19
B-2
B-61
B-27
B-17
B-60
B-1
B-16
B-153
B-157
B-155
B-12
B-75
B-72
B-73 B-84
B-59
B-85
B-82
B-80
B-83
B-60
B-20
B-156 B-65
DF-43870
B-66
B-2
B-29
B-154
B-11
B-2
B-153
B-81
DG-40135
B-11
B-88
B-8
B-109
DF-43940
B-5
N
R
O
DF-46666
C-62
B-28
B-6
DF-43937
Y Rail Assy
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
Supplement Cursor Assy
Cursor Assy
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
C-157
C-67
C-68
C-69
C-158
C-151
C-109
C-155
C-145
C-111
C-69
C-110
C-154
C-151
C-153
DF-49659
C-156
C-112
C-150
C-152
C-144
DG-40354
C-126
DF-46672
C-106
C-148
C-93
C-147
C-104
C-105
C-121
C-125
C-162
C-161
C-163
C-102
DF-48141
C-115
C-124
DF-49062
C-143
C-142
C-103
C-117
C-136
C-134
DF-48986
C-144
DG-40353
C-96
C-122
C-118
C-98
C-99
C-116
DF-42234
C-36
C-97
C-140
C-25
DF-49684
C-123
C-33
C-120
C-10
C-11
C-35
C-87
C-132
C-82
C-131
C-200
C-21
C-132
C-143
C-12
C-92
C-62
C-34
C-9
C-29
C-66
C-36
C-33
C-88
C-119
C-77
DF-48983
C-22
C-32
C-30
C-75
C-130
C-73
C-6
C-4
C-5
C-9
C-76
C-86
C-44
C-11
C-10
C-45
C-46
C-80
C-31
C-52
C-54
C-85
C-5
C-31
C-12
C-51 C-61
C-53
C-74
C-9
C-10
C-11 C-20
C-61
C-47
C-12
C-194
C-180
C-45
T
N
R
O
C-22
DG-40326
C-16
C-17
C-46
C-47
C-48
C-184
C-186
C-196
C-19
C-178
C-195
C-1
C-9
C-10
C-11
C-57
C-81
D-2
C-32
C-30 C-12
C-62
C-48
C-179
C-60
C-4
C-6
C-185
C-15
C-18
C-16
C-19
C-17
C-18
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Cursor Assy
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
7
Supplement Maintenance Assy
Maintenance Assy
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
DG-40317
D-19
D-20
DG-40355
DG-40318
D-21
D-23
DG-40357
DG-40356
D-18
D-93
D-31
D-25
D-87
D-24
D-97
D-30
D-92
D-91
D-96
D-99
D-90
D-28
D-97
D-95
D-94
D-94
D-29
D-32
D-15
D-98
D-27
D-102
A-1
D-78
D-78
D-37
DG-40356
D-8
D-12
D-14
D-7
D-2
D-101
DF-49687
D-40
D-11
D-13
D-34
DG-40356
DF-49686
D-43
D-102
D-38
D-9
D-41
D-11
D-36
D-35
D-13
D-42
D-1
D-10
R
O
D-102
DG-40356
Maintenance Assy
2007.04.02 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
Supplement I/H Assy
I/H Assy
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
E-76
E-32
E-32
E-10
E-74
E-31
DG-40339
DF-47837
E-9
DF-46700
E-35
E-31
E-34
E-7
E-22 E-8
DF-46671
E-79
E-11
E-75
E-6
E-73
E-35
To Cartridge
DF-43968
E-33
E-81
E-70
E-69
E-68
E-66
E-67
E-65
E-79
DF-46671
E-12
E-48
E-75
E-58
E-59
E-29
E-87
E-28
E-76
E-49
DF-46671
E-57
E-76
E-50
E-21
E-2
E-75
DF-46672
E-14
E-13
DG-40340
E-4
E-3
E-30
E-73
E-44
E-19
E-78
E-63
E-64
E-60
E-22
E-17
E-16
E-76
E-33
E-34
E-42
H-83
E-61
E-24
E-77
H-82
E-74
DG-40341
E-51
E-1
E-62
E-53
E-60
E-63
E-55
E-64
E-42
E-71
E-61
E-53
DF-46671
E-88
E-56
E-90
E-25
E-84
DG-40342
E-88
E-41
E-83
E-27
E-25
E-39
RE
AR
E-84
E-41
E-40
E-39
E-85
E-40
I/H Assy
E-83
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
9
Supplement Leg Assy
Leg Assy
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
F-30
F-26
F-8
F-26
F-1
F-16
F-16
F-23
F-15
DF-44172
F-22
F-21
DF-47867
F-20
F-2
F-19
F-9
F-4
F-4
F-11
F-3
F-11
F-5
F-13
F-10
R
O
F-6
Leg Assy
F-12
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
10
Supplement Roll Media Holder Assy
Roll Media Holder Assy
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
G-2
G-5
G-4
G-6
G-8
G-7
G-14
G-20
G-19
G-15
A-200
G-3
G-1
G-9
G-12
G-14
G-13
G-15
G-2
G-18
G-5
G-4
G-6
DG- 40359
G-18
G-8
G-7
G-13
G-12
G-3
DG- 40358
G-1
G-19
RE
AR
G-20
G-9
Roll Media Holder Assy

2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
11
Supplement Cover Assy
Cover Assy
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
H-91
H-127
H-90
H-126
H-113
H-80
H-80
H-79
DG- 40170
H-112
H-128
H-53
H-55
H-124
H-121
DF- 48977
H-120
H-113
H-73
H-121
H-58
H-24
H-125
H-85
H-57
H-82
H-49
DG-40360
H-53
H-48
H-47
H-25
H-104
H-122
H-7
H-114
H-80
H-72
H-212
H-84
J-17
H-54
H-52
H-123
H-110
H-107
H-103
H-111
H-180
H-178
DF- 47864
H-56
H-2
H-44
H-183
H-32
H-33
H-105
H-168
H-10
H-23
H-177
H-174
H-165
H-167
H-166
H-170
H-167
H-164
DF- 49022
H-14
H-22
H-199
H-6
H-67
H-66
H-15
H-20
H-198
H-31
H-28
H-21
K-28
H-27
H-60
H-173
H-172
H-171
H-106
H-89
DG-40347
H-179
DG-40346
H-88
H-43
DF- 47864
H-181
H-184
H-181
H-176
H-77
H-34
DG- 40362
H-186
H-108
H-1
H-61
H-35
H-187
H-67
H-28
H-46
H-40
H-36
H-78
H-45
H-39
H-8
H-78
H-13
H-197
H-199
H-202
H-201
H-202
H-198 H-196
H-5
H-22
H-12
H-216
H-133
H-130
H-202
H-191
H-192
H-20
H-145
H-69
H-193
H-193
H-190
H-146
H-142
H-4
H-153
H-131
H-143
H-150
H-144
H-149
H-151
H-204
H-203
H-98
H-201
H-202
DG-40361
H-152
H-71
H-154
H-3
ON
FR
DF-47864
H-215
DG-40347
H-158
H-157
H-97
H-39
DF- 47864
H-40
H-161
H-205
H-160
H-139
H-161
DG-40346
Cover Assy
H-138
H-137
H-138
H-140
H-70
H-136
DG-40366 H-139
H-69
H-68
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
12
Supplement Winding Unit Assy 1
Winding Unit Assy 1
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
DG-40479
I-148
I-100
I-116
I-99
I-116
I-100
I-158
I-101
I-141
I-113
I-62
I-63
I-107
I-64
I-108
I-71
I-93
I-91
I-68
I-61
I-70
I-151
I-98
I-103
I-29
I-35
I-95
I-69
DG-40478
I-92
(GGF#UU[
I-38
I-94
I-114
I-142
I-115
DG-40473
I-36
I-100
I-52
I-143
I-103
I-227
I-28
I-65
I-74
DG-40471
I-10
I-66
I-54
I-83
DG-40472
I-66
I-37
I-11
I-39
I-6
I-25
I-14
I-40
I-4
I-49
I-75
I-2
I-84
I-80
I-17
I-51
I-50
I-53
I-26
I-46
I-178
I-20
I-103
I-79
I-26
I-175
I-16
I-24
I-41
I-18
I-12
I-82
DG-40481
I-5
I-45
I-81
I-106
I-178
I-80
I-84
I-214
I-47
I-25
I-15
I-105
I-5
R
O
DG-40480
I-86
I-177
I-85
I-31
I-87
I-30
I-1
2007.03.28 Rev.B
Winding Unit
Assy 1
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
8
13
Supplement Winding Unit Assy 2
Winding Unit Assy 2
1 23 4 56 7
Exploded View
I-126
I-125
I-160
I-159
I-123
I-124
I-158
I-156
I-159
I-148
I-121
I-214
DG-40474
I-157
I-151
I-130
I-148
I-147
I-128
I-148
I-129
I-158
I-150
I-171
I-127
I-128
I-160
I-169
I-170
I-172
I-213
I-151
I-165
I-144
I-141
(GGF#UU[
I-203(J)
DG-40485
I-201
I-172
I-170
I-203(A)
I-167
DG-40484
I-169
N
R
O
F
DG-40477
DG-40475
I-171
I-166
Winding Unit Assy 2

2007.03.28 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1604
1 23 4 56 7
8
14

Manual Mantenimiento VJ1604 Mutoh

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Mantenimiento VJ1604 Mutoh

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

The product and the contents of this publication may be changed

MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. shall not be liable for any damages or

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

About this Manual

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

About this Manual

Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labeled on the printer

Explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.

Explains the specifications of the printer.

Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the service parts

Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer.

Explains the maintenance mode of the printer.

Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.

Explains daily maintenance of the printer.

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

About this Manual

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

General Table of Contents

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

4.4 Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

4.5 Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

4.9 Replacing Maintenance Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10 Replacing IH Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11 Replacing Leg Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

5.15 ExControl Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.16 PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

7.6 CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes.............................................................. 1- 2

Important Safety Instructions ................................................................ 1- 3

Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 1- 9

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

1.3 Important Safety Instructions

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

When handling power supply cables, be careful for the following:

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

When cleaning the cleaning wiper

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

VJ-1604 Maintenance Manual

1.4 Warning Labels

Handling the Warning Labels